JP6793446B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

Further, conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") is known. Then, a game machine has been proposed in which a plurality of games in which an AT function is executed are set as one set and the AT function is managed in a set unit (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 is equipped with a so-called addition function in which one or more sets of ATs are given when a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the AT function (during AT).

According to such a game machine, the execution of at least one set of AT is guaranteed by satisfying a predetermined condition during AT, so that there is a high possibility that a large number of game media can be acquired. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the number of sets will be added during AT. In addition, by determining the addition of the number of sets during AT, there is a possibility that AT will continue beyond the AT rights granted at the start of AT, and the expectation that AT execution will be decided will be increased. Can be enhanced.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-200497

However, the game machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 has a simple game property of whether or not there is an AT set (AT right), and the game during AT tends to be monotonous. As a result, there was a risk that the interest of the game would decline.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming during AT.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Insertion operation detecting means (for example, medal sensor 35S described later) for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 16S described later) that detects a start operation by the player based on the detection of the throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process described later) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means.
A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three reels, which will be described later), which are composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely display a symbol required for the game based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R) and
A stop operation detection means (for example, a stop switch 17S described later) that detects a stop operation by the player, and
A stop control means (for example, a reel stop control process described later) for stopping the variation display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means.
A notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) for notifying information for displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means on a determination line straddling the plurality of display rows. )When,
A notification game control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 42 described later) for controlling the operation of a notification game (for example, an R_ART game described later) in which notification by the notification means is executed is provided.
The notification game is composed of a plurality of layers (for example, LV.1 to LV.5 of R_ART described later) in which the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games described later).
The notification game control means can start the notification game from a layer other than the lowest layer in the plurality of layers (for example, LV.1 of R_ART described later) , and the highest layer in the plurality of layers (for example, for example). When a predetermined condition (for example, the total of EX points in R_ART described later reaches a specified value) is satisfied in each layer except LV.5) of R_ART described later, the device is moved to the next higher layer, and the plurality of layers are described. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied in each layer other than the lowest layer in the layer, the game is moved to the next lower layer, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the lowest layer, the notification game is terminated.
A specific layer (for example, LV.2 of R_ART described later) other than the lowest layer among the plurality of layers has a plurality of stages (for example, an opponent (enemy) described later) having different easiness of satisfying the predetermined conditions. Have A to D))
At the time of transition to the specific hierarchy, one stage is determined from the plurality of stages (for example, LV.2 opponent lottery processing described later), and the stage is determined.
Wherein the plurality of stages, the type of grade that is determined when the notification game is started (e.g., grade A~C below) Ru is determined in accordance with the
The gaming machine which is characterized a call.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during AT.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view of the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT0) (the 1) for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT0) (2) for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (while carrying over BB) for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT0 BB general middle) for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT1 RB carry-over) for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (No. 1) for RB gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (2) for the RB game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for a bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for turning cylinder stop (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for turning cylinder stop (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the combo generation lottery table in RT4 game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the combo continuation rate lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the combo continuous lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (BB non-carryover) (the 1) of the winning combination and the stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (BB is not carried over) (the 2) of the winning combination and the stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (in BB1-4 carry-over) of a winning combination and a stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (BB5 carry-over) of a winning combination and a stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (during RB carry-over in BB) of a winning combination and a stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition form in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT game state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the sub-game state of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific mode MAP lottery table at the time of setting change in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the high-accuracy stock lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (without high accuracy stock) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (with high accuracy stock) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ initial FS point lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FS point lottery table in CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table at the end of CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the high accuracy stock lottery table at the end of CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point in CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART grade lottery table (CZ) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART grade lottery table (RTG) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART grade lottery table (BB5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 1) waiting for ART end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 2) waiting for ART end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 3) waiting for ART end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 1) in level 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 2) in level 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 3) in level 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 1) in level 3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 2) in level 3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 3) in level 3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 1) in level 4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 2) in level 4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 3) in level 4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy A) (the 1) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy A) (the 2) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy A) (the 3) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy B) (the 1) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy B) (the 2) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy B) (the 3) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy C) (the 1) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy C) (the 2) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy C) (the 3) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy D) (the 1) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy D) (the 2) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy D) (the 3) in level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode A) (the 1) in a slap RUSH in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode A) (the 2) in the slap RUSH in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode A) (the 3) in the slap RUSH in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) (the 1) in a slap RUSH in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) (the 2) in the slap RUSH in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) (the 3) in the slap RUSH in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 1) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 2) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 1) after reaching the specified point in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 2) after reaching the specified point in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 3) after reaching the specified point in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 4) after reaching the specified point in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 5) after reaching the specified point in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the level 2 loop rate lottery table (first time) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the level 2 loop rate lottery table (other than the first time) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the LV.2 loop lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the opponent lottery table (level 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the opponent lottery table (level 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the opponent mode lottery table (level 4) at the time of setting change in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition special type lottery table at the time of winning PTR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table in PREMIUM in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table (the 1) in PREMIUM in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table (2) in PREMIUM in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table at the time of combo in PREMIUM in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the loop rate lottery table in FIGHTING in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous lottery table during FIGHTING in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition drawing table (RT0) in FIGHTING in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition drawing table (RT1) in FIGHTING in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition drawing table (RT2) in FIGHTING in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition drawing table (RT3) in FIGHTING in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition drawing table (RT4) in FIGHTING in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the figure addition game number lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the figure addition game number lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the figure addition game number lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table in BURNING in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BURNING middle addition game number lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BURNING middle addition game number lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BURNING middle addition game number lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the slap mode transition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the slap RUSH precursor game number lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the slap RUSH precursor game number lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR addition lottery table in a slap RUSH in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the slap RUSH middle addition game number lottery table (1Gth) (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the slap RUSH middle addition game number lottery table (1Gth) (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the slap RUSH middle addition game number lottery table (1Gth) (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the slap RUSH loop rate lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the slap RUSH loop rate lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the slap RUSH continuous lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RTG transition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock loop rate lottery table (the 1) in RTG in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock loop rate lottery table (2) in RTG in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table in RTG in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (usually BB) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table (ARTBB) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (level 1) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (level 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (level 1) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (levels 1 and 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (level 2) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (level 4) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation type lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation type lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation type lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation type lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation type lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game lock lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lock processing at the start of a game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop button detection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the slide piece number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line mask data change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the priority pull-in control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus end check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus operation check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a whole flowchart at the time of a start lever operation which shows the processing example of the sub-control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the lottery process in CZ of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the lottery process in CZ of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the lottery processing in CZ of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery processing in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specialization start processing of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in BB of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lottery process in MICHI of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the lottery processing at the time of BB in ART of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the lottery processing at the time of BB in ART of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the lottery process at the time of BB in ART of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 4) which shows an example of the lottery processing at the time of BB in ART of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lottery processing at the time of BB illegal of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the process at the time of sub-state transition of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the process at the time of sub-state transition of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 3) which shows an example of the process at the time of sub-state transition of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 4) which shows an example of the process at the time of sub-state transition of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart (No. 5) showing an example of processing at the time of sub-state transition of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the ordinary lottery processing of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the ordinary lottery processing of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 3 is a flowchart (No. 3) showing an example of a normal lottery process of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart (the 4) which shows an example of the normal lottery processing of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the BB end processing of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the BB end processing of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in LV.1 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the processing in LV.1 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the processing in LV.1 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in LV.1,3 of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in LV.1,3,5 of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the addition specialization transition processing of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in LV.2 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the processing in LV.2 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the processing in LV.2 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in LV.2, 4 of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the conversion process of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in LV.3 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the processing in LV.3 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 3) which shows an example of the processing in LV.3 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in LV.4 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the processing in LV.4 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the processing in LV.4 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in LV.5 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the processing in LV.5 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the processing in LV.5 of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the PTR stock loop lottery processing of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special preparation process of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in PREMIUM of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the process in FIGHYING of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the process in FIGHYING of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in BURNING of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in B_RUSH of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the processing in B_RUSH of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in RTG of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the ART end waiting process of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the ART end waiting process of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of turning stop of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the process at the time of the 3rd stop operation of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the process at the time of the 3rd stop operation of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the process at the time of the 3rd stop operation of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game lock process of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of setting change of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and the winning probability of replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed are calculated. A pachi-slot machine having a function of operating a higher gaming state than normal, that is, an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which a replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") function is operated at the same time will be described. ..

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set. The number is set for one symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. Let me.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is performed. Various productions are performed using it.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

[Appearance structure]
First, the appearance structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic front configuration view of the vicinity of the liquid crystal screen of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a.

Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handles 7 on one side are shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7.

As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 described later, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means) are provided inside the cabinet 2a, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are in the lateral direction (reels). Are arranged in a row in the direction orthogonal to the direction of rotation of. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel (display row) has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material along the circumferential direction (reel rotation direction), and the symbols adjacent to each other along the arrangement direction of the symbols are arranged at predetermined intervals. To.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3), and a lumbar panel 12. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot machine 1.

The liquid crystal display device 11 (notifying means) is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and performs an effect by displaying an image. As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (4L, 4C, 4R) for displaying the symbols drawn on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. Display screen) 11a is provided. In the present embodiment, the image is displayed and the effect is executed by using the entire display unit 11a including the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

The three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the placement areas of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), and are located in front of the three reels (player side). It is provided to do so. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind them through the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R.

In the present embodiment, each display window is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols drawn (arranged) on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window is stopped. It is set to a size that can display one pattern. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (hereinafter, referred to as the upper area, the middle area, and the lower area, respectively) are provided in the frame of each display window for each reel. One symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. That is, the symbols are displayed in the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R in a 3 × 3 arrangement form. Then, in the present embodiment, the line (cross-up line) connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R is used as an effective line for determining whether or not to win. Define.

The front panel 10 is attached so as to cover the peripheral portion of the display screen (display unit 11a) of the liquid crystal display device 11 at the upper part of the door body 9, and is arranged so as to be superimposed on the front surface of the display unit 11a. The door. The front panel 10 is transparent to close the decorative frame 101 in which the three panel openings 101a for exposing the necessary display screen area in the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 are formed and the three panel openings 101a in the decorative frame 101. Has a protective cover 102 (see FIG. 2).

Further, the decorative frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and effect switches 22L and 22R (hereinafter, referred to as a left effect switch 22L and a right effect switch 22R).

The lamp group 21 includes, for example, a lamp 21a provided on the left side of the decorative frame 101 and a lamp 21b provided on the right side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 3). Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the left effect switch 22L is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side, and is provided on the lower left corner of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player side. Be placed. On the other hand, the right effect switch 22R is provided on the right side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side, and is arranged on the lower right corner of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player side.

Further, the central movable unit 105, the left movable unit 106, and the right movable unit 107 are attached to the decorative frame 101.

The central movable unit 105 is arranged in the central portion near the upper end in the decorative frame 101 and has a movable part 309. For example, when a specific effect is performed, the central movable unit 105 rotates and lowers the movable component 309 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the left-right direction. As a result, the movable component 309 moves to a position that covers a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

The left movable unit 106 is arranged near the left end in the decorative frame 101 and has a left door 188. Further, the right movable unit 107 is arranged near the right end in the decorative frame 101 and has a right door 189. The left movable unit 106 rotates the left door 188 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) about an axis extending in the vertical direction, for example, when a predetermined effect is performed. Further, the right movable unit 107 rotates the right door 189 at the initial position around an axis extending in the vertical direction, for example, when a predetermined effect is performed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, one of the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated, or both the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated when a predetermined effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the waist panel 12 is provided substantially in the center of the door body 9, and the waist panel 12 is formed with a pedestal portion 13. The pedestal portion 13 has various devices (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15A, 1BET button 15B, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, clearing button 18, etc.) to be operated by the player. ) Is provided.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used in one game up to a preset predetermined number (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 15A and the 1BET button 15B are provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Further, the settlement button 18 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 5) composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 6 is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 and a payout number display 6a that displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) as a privilege with a two-digit number. It is composed of a stored number display 6b that displays the number of medals (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits) in a two-digit number.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a bet number display LED 8 (see FIG. 5) adjacent to the 7-segment display 6. The bet number display LED 8 is composed of three LED lamps. Specifically, at the start of the three unit games, the 1BET lamp 8a that lights up when the player drops the first medal on the pachislot 1 and the 2BET that lights up when the second medal is dropped. It is composed of a lamp 8b and a 3BET lamp 8c that lights up when a third medal is dropped.

A medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 33, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, the two speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and is a diagram showing a state when the front door 2b is opened with respect to the cabinet 2a.

The cabinet 2a is composed of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member having one surface open on the front side (front door 2b side).

A main board 31 on which a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 5) described later is mounted is provided near the upper end portion in the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that determines the internal winning combination and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described in detail later.

A reel unit including a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R is provided in the vicinity of the central portion in the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 4, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 5) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. ..

A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided near the lower end portion in the cabinet 2a. Further, in the vicinity of the lower end portion in the cabinet 2a, one side portion (left side in the example shown in FIG. 4) of the hopper 33 is provided with a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1. Be done.

A sub-board 32 on which a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) described later is mounted is provided near the upper end of the front door 2b on the back surface side (opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 42 will be described in detail later.

Further, a selector 35 is provided near the substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device that selects whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside are appropriate via the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2), and the hopper 33 determines that the medals are appropriate. I will guide you to. Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 5) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

Further, in the cabinet 2a, a payout control board (not shown) on which a payout control circuit (see FIG. 5) described later is mounted is provided. The payout control circuit is a circuit that performs various controls such as control of the operation of the medal payout device 33. The specific configuration of the payout control circuit will be described in detail later.

<Circuit configuration of pachislot>
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. Note that FIG. 5 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, FIG. 6 is a block configuration diagram showing an internal configuration of the sub-control circuit.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachislot machine 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub control circuit 42, and a peripheral device (actuator) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 mounted on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. Includes 66.

The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, data tables such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for temporarily storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate (generate) a clock pulse. Then, the main CPU 51 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

Various switches, various sensors, and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and the like to control the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R.

The stop switch 17S (stop operation detecting means) detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 16S (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The checkout switch 18S detects that the checkout button has been pressed by the player. Further, the bet switch 15S detects that the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) is pressed by the player.

The medal sensor 35S (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 has passed through the selector 35.

Further, as peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (variation display means), a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. Further, a drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. Specifically, the motor drive circuit 62, the display unit drive circuit 64, and the hopper drive circuit 65 are connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects a reel index indicating that the reel has rotated once for each reel by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The reel position detection circuit 63 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs the detection result to the microcomputer 50.

Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. Further, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor to rotate the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels there are symbols). Only rotated).

Here, a method for managing the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to "1". "Is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged to the outside from the hopper 33 has reached a predetermined number of payouts. To do. The payout completion signal circuit 66 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs the check result to the microcomputer 50.

[Sub-control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the sub-control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. .. As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86. Further, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, an A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, a central movable unit drive circuit 96, a left movable unit drive circuit 97, and a right movable unit. The unit drive circuit 98 and the rotary light drive circuit 99 are included.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, an effect random value is extracted, and an effect content (effect data) is determined. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the lamp group 21, and a speaker. A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 20L and 20R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and BGM (Back-Ground Music). It includes various storage areas such as a storage area for storing sound data related to sound effects and sound data, and a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light.

The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content, effect data, and the like, and a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations transmitted from the main control circuit 41.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a liquid crystal display device 11, speakers 20L and 20R, a lamp group 21, a left effect switch 22L, a right effect switch 22R, a central movable unit 105, and a left movable unit. Peripheral devices such as 106, a right movable unit 107, and a revolving light 124 are connected. That is, the operation of these peripheral devices is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and the created image is generated by the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed.

The sub CPU 81, DSP 90, audio RAM 91, A / D converter 92, and amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

The sub CPU 81 and the central movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the central movable unit 105 according to the central movable unit drive data specified by the effect content. That is, the central movable unit 105 is driven when a specific effect is performed, and moves the movable component 309 to a position that covers a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 according to the left movable unit drive data specified by the effect content. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 according to the right movable unit drive data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 81 and the revolving light driving circuit 99 drive the revolving light 124 according to the revolving light driving data specified by the effect content.

Further, the left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R each detect that they have been pressed by the player, and transmit the detection results to the sub-control circuit 42 described later.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 42.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 7). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and defines the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the direction of rotation of the reels (direction from the symbol position "19" in FIG. 7 toward the symbol position "0") with the symbol position "0" as a reference, " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter ("0" to "19") and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the display window. The type of can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "7", the symbol position "8" is set in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L in the frame of the left display window 4L, respectively. The symbol "cherry", the symbol "watermelon" at the symbol position "7", and the symbol "replay 1" at the symbol position "6" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (Nos. 1 to 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 11. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of privilege, the display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts. In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, not only the symbol combination related to the privilege (bonus, medal payout, re-game) but also the symbol that triggers the transition of the RT game state to the RT1 game state is displayed in the symbol combination table. The combination (see the symbol combination related to the code name “HZR01” (G_bell spilled eye 1) in FIG. 8) is also described as a display combination.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (cross-up line) matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. Is judged to be a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals and operating the replay. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination column is data for designating the display combination storage area (see FIG. 43 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In this embodiment, 32 display combination storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out.

For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination (G_9 bells) according to any of the code names "FR01" to "FR05" is determined as the display combination for the number of inserted three medals, Nine medals will be paid out (see FIG. 10). Further, for example, when a display combination (G_CD watermelon, G_middle stage watermelon, G_CU watermelon) having any of the code names "FR06" to "FR08" is determined as the display combination for the number of inserted three medals. Will be paid out for four medals (see FIG. 10).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the replay (for example, the symbol combination of the display combination (G_RT1 transition lip 1) related to the code name "RP01" in FIG. 8) is determined as the display combination, the replay is performed. Works. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as a display combination, a display combination related to "BB (Big Bonus)" (a symbol combination of display combinations (G_BB1 to G_BB5) related to the code names "BB01" to "BB05" in FIG. 8). When is decided
BB operates.

[Bonus activation table]
Next, the bonus operating table will be described with reference to FIG. When the bonus is activated, the bonus activation table is stored in the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 44 described later), the bonus end number counter, the game possible count counter, and the winning possible count counter provided in the main RAM 53. Prescribe the data to be played.

The game status flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game in operation. In the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as "RB") are provided as the types of bonus games. "RB" is a so-called first-class special accessory. The "BB" is called a bonus continuous operation device related to the first-class special bonus, and increases the probability that the "RB" is activated.
The "BB" according to the present invention may be one in which the "RB" is continuously operated. In this case, it means that "RB" is also operating when "BB" is operating.

The bonus end number counter is a counter (data) for managing whether or not the number of medals paid out exceeds a predetermined number that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the display combination related to the code names "BB01" to "BB05" in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 8 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, "BB" is activated. After that, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number "44" is paid out, "BB" ends.

In the above-mentioned operation of "BB", first, at the start of the bonus, the numerical value (specified number) specified in the bonus operation table is stored in the bonus end number counter. Then, each time the medal is paid out during the bonus operation, the value of the bonus end number counter is subtracted. Then, when the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to a value less than "0", the operating bonus ends.

The playable number counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games that can be played when the “RB” is activated, that is, the so-called playable number of times. The winning count counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games in which the combination of symbols related to winning can be displayed when the "BB (RB)" is operated, that is, the so-called winning count. ..

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the transition source and the transition destination.

In the present embodiment, five types of RT game states are provided, from RT0 game state to RT4 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of replays and their winning probabilities are different from each other. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, or the digestion of the specified number of games is the transition condition between the RT gaming states. Become.

Specifically, the migration source is the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state, and the code names are "FR14" (G_L1st miss 1), "FR15" (G_L1st miss 2), and "FR16" (G_L1st miss 3). , "FR17" (G_L1st Miss 4), "FR18" (G_L1st Miss 5), "FR19" (G_L1st Miss 6), "FR20" (G_L1st Miss 7), "FR21" (G_L1st Miss 8), "FR22" ( G_C1st Miss 1), "FR23" (G_C1st Miss 2), "FR24" (G_C1st Miss 3), "FR25" (G_C1st Miss 4), "FR26" (G_R1st Miss 1), "FR27" (G_R1st Miss 2), Design combination of display combinations related to any of "FR28" (G_R1st mistake 3), "FR29" (G_R1st mistake 4), "FR30" (G_R1st mistake 5) and "FR31" (G_R1st mistake 6) ) Is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. Further, when the transition source is the RT2 game state, when the specified number of games (for example, 20 games) is exhausted, the RT game state shifts to the RT0 game state. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to RB is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

Further, the migration source is the RT0 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state, and the code names are "RP01" (G_RT1 transition lip 1), "RP02" (G_RT1 transition lip 2), and "HZR01" (G_bell spilled eye 1). ), "HZR02" (G_bell spilled eyes 2), "HZR03" (G_bell spilled eyes 3) and "HZR04" (G_bell spilled eyes 4). When is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. Further, when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, when the transition source is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state and the symbol combination of the display combination related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT gaming state is changed. It shifts to the RT1 game state. Further, when the transition source is the RT1 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state and the symbol combination of the display combination related to the code name "RP04" (G_RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT gaming state is changed. It shifts to the RT3 game state. Further, in the RT3 game state, when the symbol combination of the display combination related to the code name "RP05" (G_RT4 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the RT game state shifts to the RT4 game state.

The characteristics of each RT gaming state and the transition flow between the RT gaming states will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

[Internal lottery table decision table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between each game state and the number of medals inserted, the internal lottery table, and the number of lottery sets set in each game state.

Specifically, in the general game state (the number of medals inserted is "3"), the internal lottery table for the general game state is used, and "91" is set as the number of lottery. Further, in the RB game state (the number of medals inserted is "3"), the internal lottery table for RB is used, and "88" is set as the number of lottery.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 25. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning number and the lottery value when each winning number is determined in each of the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) and the RB gaming state.

In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus or small winning combination. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random number value) extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) is set as a lottery value defined corresponding to each winning number. Subtract sequentially with. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of subtraction is negative (“digits” occur) at the predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number has been won.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the winning number defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data (data pointer described later) will be determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

(1) Internal lottery table for general game status (RT0)
15 and 16 are diagrams showing the configuration of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state. This internal lottery table for the general gaming state is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "91" and the lottery value.

For example, in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the probability that the winning number "2" (abbreviated as "F_RT01 maintenance lip 1") will be won by referring to the setting 6 of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is "1394 / 65536 ". Then, when the winning number "2" is won, "2" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer described later.

(2) Internal lottery table for general game status (RT1)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (RT1) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT1) is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the internal lottery table (RT1) for the general game state, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and the lottery value is defined.

When the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. 15 is the inside for RT1. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the fields of the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

(3) Internal lottery table for general game status (RT2)
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (RT2) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT2) is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the internal lottery table (RT2) for the general game state, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and the lottery value is defined.

When the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. 15 is the inside for RT2. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the fields of the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

(4) Internal lottery table for general game status (RT3)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (RT3) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT3) is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the internal lottery table (RT3) for the general game state, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and the lottery value is defined.

When the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. 15 is the inside for RT3. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the fields of the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

(5) Internal lottery table for general game status (RT4)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (RT4) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT4) is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the internal lottery table (RT4) for the general game state, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and the lottery value is defined.

When the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 15 is the inside for RT4. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the fields of the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the lottery table. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

(6) Internal lottery table for general game status (while carrying over BB)
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (during BB carry-over) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general game state (BB carried over) is a table that is referred to when the BB is carried over (non-bonus game state). Carry-over is a state in which any one of BB1 to BB5 is determined as an internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination is stored as a carry-over combination in a carry-over combination storage area described later. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. In the internal lottery table for the general game state (while carrying over the BB), the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" and the lottery value is defined.

When the BB is being carried over, the lottery values specified in the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for general gaming state shown in FIG. , The lottery value specified in the fields of the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal lottery table for general game state (while carrying over BB) is changed. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used. Be done.

(7) Internal lottery table for general game status (RT0 BB general)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table (RT0 BB in general) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT0 BB general) is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (in BB). In the internal lottery table for the general game state (RT0 BB general), the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" and the lottery value is defined.

In the case of the RT0 gaming state (in BB), it is defined in the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state shown in FIG. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal lottery table for general game state (RT0 BB general). At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used. Be done.

(8) Internal lottery table for general game status (RT1 RB carried over)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table for a general gaming state (RT1 RB is being carried over). The internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT1 RB carry-over) is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (RB carry-over). In the internal lottery table for the general game state (RT1 RB carried over), the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" and the lottery value is defined.

In the case of the RT1 gaming state (RB is being carried over), the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 15 are specified. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT1 RB is being carried over). At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used. Be done.

(9) Internal lottery table for RB game state FIGS. 24 and 25 are diagrams showing the configuration of an internal lottery table for RB game state. The internal lottery table for the RB gaming state is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the RB gaming state (BB gaming state). In the internal lottery table for the RB game state, the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "88" and the lottery value is defined.

For example, in the RB game state (BB game state), the probability that the winning number “54” (abbreviated as “F_common bell”) is won by referring to the internal lottery table for RB is “21681/65536”.

Further, as is clear from the various internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 15 to 25, in the present embodiment, “lost” occurs in the internal lottery process. Although not shown in FIGS. 15 to 25, the winning number "0" is assigned to "off".

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

The small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are data acquired based on the winning number acquired as a result of the lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and are defined by the internal winning combination determination table. It is the data for designating the internal winning combination to be played.

Although not shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, in the "internal winning combination" column in the internal winning combination determination table, not only the code name and abbreviation indicating the internal winning combination but also the display along the valid line is permitted. , Data for identifying the combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is specified. Specifically, the identification data of the "internal winning combination" is represented by a combination of 1-byte data and a storage area, similarly to the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 8 to 11. A unique combination of symbols is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

In addition, the “○” mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer. When the data pointer is "0", the content of the "internal winning combination" is "off", which is a combination of all the symbols specified by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 8 to 11. Indicates that the display of is not permitted.

FIG. 26 shows an internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the small winning combination and the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) for the small combination / replay data pointers "1" to "58". That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer, the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals, the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay, and the like.

For example, when "1" is acquired as a data pointer for a small role / replay, the code names "RP06" (G_upper lip), "RP07" (G_middle lip), and "RP08" (RP08) are used as internal winning combinations. G_lower lip) and "RP09" (G_CU lip) are duplicated.

In the present embodiment, the code names "HZR01" (G_bell spilled eyes 1), "HZR02" (G_bell spilled eyes 2), "HZR03" (G_bell spilled eyes 3), "HZR04" (HZR04) shown in FIG. G_bell spilled eyes 4) is not an internal winning role. Design combinations related to code names "HZR01" (G_bell spilled eyes 1), "HZR02" (G_bell spilled eyes 2), "HZR03" (G_bell spilled eyes 3), "HZR04" (G_bell spilled eyes 4) Bell spilled eyes) may be displayed when the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination related to the bell described later cannot be stopped and displayed.

FIG. 27 shows an internal winning combination determination table for bonuses. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game for the bonus data pointers "1" to "6". That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 27, for example, when "5" is acquired as the bonus data pointer, the code name "BB05" (G_BB5) is won as the internal winning combination.

For example, when the winning number "59" is won, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "5" is acquired as the bonus data pointer. As a result, the code names "RP06" (G_upper lip), "RP07" (G_middle lip), "RP08" (G_lower lip), "RP09" (G_CU lip), "BB05" (G_BB5) are used as internal winning roles. ) Is a duplicate win. If the winning number "59" is won during the BB carry-over and during the general BB, since the BB has already been determined as the internal winning combination, the code name "BB05" (G_BB5) related to the winning number "59" is used. The internal winning combination becomes invalid.

[Number selection table for stopping rotation]
Next, the rotation stop number selection table will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 shows a number selection table for stopping the rotation (No. 1). The rotation stop number selection table (No. 1) defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the rotation stop number. The reel stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process (see FIG. 30 described later) described later.

FIG. 29 shows a number selection table for stopping the rotation (No. 2). The rotation stop number selection table (No. 2) defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the rotation stop number. In the present embodiment, from the acquisition of the bonus data pointer to the display of the corresponding BB symbol combination, the rotation stop number selection table (No. 2) is referred to and the rotation stop number is displayed. Is selected.

The rotating cylinder stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotating cylinder stop number for each data pointer. Specifically, the small role / replay data pointers "0" to "58" are associated with the rotation stop numbers "0" to "58", respectively, and the bonus data pointers "1" to "6" are associated with each other. , The rotating cylinder stop numbers "59" to "64" are associated with each other. Therefore, for example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3", the rotation stop number "3" is selected.

The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotation stop number for each data pointer, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the rotating cylinder stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same rotating cylinder stop number may be specified for different data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initialization table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority table selection process described later and the determination process of the number of sliding pieces of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation cylinder stop number, a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push. The correspondence between the initial table change data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is specified.

The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used in the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation cylinder stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table specified in the pull-in priority table described later (see FIG. 36 described later) is specified. It is possible to acquire data on the priority of the display combination corresponding to the number.

Further, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation cylinder stop number is not specified in the reel stop initial setting table, pull-in is performed with reference to the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 35 described later) described later. The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the priority table selection table number is determined.

For the forward-pressed table selection data, forward-pressed table change data, and forward-pressed table change initial data, a stop table (see FIGS. 31 to 33 described later) to be referred to when forward-pressed is performed is specified. It is the data for. In addition, the "forward push" referred to in this specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation (the first stop operation is performed) is performed on the left reel 3L, and specifically, " Corresponds to the pressing order of "left middle right" and "left and right middle".

The irregular push table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 34 described later) to be referred to when the irregular push is performed. The "irregular push" referred to in the present specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is "middle left / right", "middle right / left", and "middle right / left". Corresponds to the pressing order of "right middle left" and "right middle left".

In the present embodiment, for example, in the general gaming state (non-bonus gaming state), after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped at a predetermined position within 190 msec. In this reel stop operation, in the reel on which the stop operation is performed, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected. Then, the symbol position corresponding to the value obtained by the addition is determined as the symbol position for stopping the rotation of the reel (this is referred to as a "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is started, and this is referred to as the "stop start position".

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the predetermined reel from the detection of the stop operation on the predetermined reel by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the predetermined reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the predetermined reel in the display window during the period from the detection of the stop operation on the predetermined reel by the stop switch 17S to the stop of the rotation of the predetermined reel. .. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation by the stop switch 17S is detected.

With reference to the stop table described later, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the scheduled stop position of the reel is not immediately determined by the acquired number of sliding pieces.

Further, in the present embodiment, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”) acquired based on the stop table (see FIG. 31 described later) described later. , The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 36 described later) described later. Then, the number of sliding pieces determination data is used to determine the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position 4 or 1 ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces. Used.

In the present embodiment, different stop tables are used according to the pressing order of the stop buttons for forward pressing and irregular pressing. Specifically, in the case of forward pressing, the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 31 described later) and the second and third stop tables for forward pressing (see FIG. 33 described later) will be described later. See) and. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the irregular pressing stop table described later (see FIG. 34 described later) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described. The first stop table for forward pressing shown in FIG. 31 is a stop table that is referred to when the forward pressing table selection data is “01”. The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence between the stop start positions "0" to "19" of the left reel 3L and the slip piece number determination data and the change status.

For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the slip piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to the forward press control change table (see FIG. 32 described later) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the control change table at the time of forward pressing will be described with reference to FIG. The forward press control change table shown in FIG. 32 is a change table that is referred to when the forward press table change data is "00". The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the position where the left reel 3L is scheduled to stop), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward push.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 31) is "1" and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is "15", the change status is "15". It becomes "0", and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes "12". If the change status and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward push are not registered in the target position in the control change table at the time of forward push, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity define 1 byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions "0" to "20".

The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 33 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "08". Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 34 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is "07".

Is the stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity appropriate as the position where the symbol position associated with itself stops the rotation of the reel? Has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data provides information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the "A line" column and the "B line" column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by assigning information on which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bits corresponding to the "line change" column in each stop table.

That is, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular time specify a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be changed based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The data for determining the number of sliding pieces is determined as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is specified.

Then, with reference to the designated bit string, each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces is sequentially searched for whether or not "1" is defined as the corresponding data. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is used as the sliding piece number determination data.

Whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column is determined by referring to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it has been done. Then, when it is determined to change the line, the column of "B line" is specified thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 35. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the pull-in priority table selection table number and the stop button pressing order and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction priority table (see FIG. 36 described later) described later.

When the left reel 3L is first stopped, the data in the column of "first stop on the left reel" in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "01", the attraction priority table number "00" is first acquired. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 35, when the middle reel 3C is secondly stopped, the pull-in priority table number “01” is acquired. On the other hand, when the right reel 3R is secondly stopped, the pull-in priority table number "00" is maintained.

Further, in the pull-in priority table selection table, if the pull-in priority table number is not registered in the target position column in the table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is displayed. Obtained as a pull-in priority table number. For example, when the middle reel 3C is first stopped and the pull-in priority table selection table number is "00", the pull-in priority table number is not registered in the column of the target position corresponding to the pressing order. Therefore, in this case, the column on the right side of the column of the first stop of the right reel corresponding to the attraction priority table selection table number "00" is referred to, and "01" is acquired as the attraction priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the pull-in priority table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type in each of the pull-in priority table numbers "00" to "09" and the predetermined priority.

The pull-in priority table is used to search for a more appropriate number of slip pieces in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority to be stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Further, each pull-in data is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 8 to 11, and each bit in the 1-byte data has a unique symbol. Combinations are assigned.

In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned first stop table for forward push (see FIG. 31). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table, a more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that are allowed to be stopped by the internal winning combination.

In the present embodiment, in the attraction priority table, the stop display (pull-in) of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having the higher priority is the combination of the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having the lower priority. It is given priority over the stop display.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, not only the priority of the internal winning combination is different depending on the attraction priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions is different. For example, when the attraction priority table number is "00", the number of priority divisions is 3, and when the attraction priority table number is "36", the number of priority divisions is 2. ..

Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is "00" will be described, and the description of the priority in the other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted. When the pull-in priority table number is "00", the pull-in data corresponding to the code name "RP06" is defined in the priority "1".

In the priority order "2" when the pull-in priority table number is "00", the pull-in data corresponding to the code names "RP01" to "RP05" and "RP07" to "RP32" is defined. Then, in the priority order "3" when the pull-in priority table number is "00", the pull-in data corresponding to the code names "FR01" to "FR31" and "HZR01" to "HZR05" is defined.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The search order table is an order in which the number of sliding pieces is preferentially applied from a predetermined numerical range (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4) (hereinafter, “search order””. ) Is specified. The search order table shown in FIG. 37 is a table to be referred to when stop control is performed with the maximum number of sliding pieces being four.

The search order table defines the number of slip pieces determination data obtained based on the above-mentioned stop table and the search order thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be applied preferentially is determined based on the number of sliding pieces determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply the one having a higher search order. Further, in the present embodiment, stop control is performed for all reels with a maximum number of sliding pieces of 4.

In this embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 181 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lowest search order "5" (or "2") in the search order table. The numerical value corresponding to the search order "1" is preferentially applied as the number of sliding pieces.

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described with reference to FIG. 38. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the data of the internal winning combination that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the effective line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 11).

For example, when the symbol "white 7" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 3L, it is displayed in the storage areas 1 to 32 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (white 7) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the possible internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically stacked and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47 described later) described later.

[Game lock lottery table]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific internal winning combination is won, a game lock lottery is performed. Then, when the lottery is won, a predetermined reel effect (game lock) is performed during the period of the reel acceleration process. While the game lock is occurring, even if the throwing operation or the stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed. The game lock lottery table described here is mainly used for determining various patterns of game locks performed during the reel acceleration process.

Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 39. The game lock lottery table defines a lottery value of the type (lock number) of the game lock to be won according to the winning number (data pointer) determined by the internal lottery.

The game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39 includes winning numbers "59" (abbreviation "F_BB5 + F_RT no transition lip"), "60" (abbreviation "F_BB5 + F_SP lip") and "61" to (abbreviation "F_BB4 + F_chance lip 1"). In each of "88" (abbreviation "F_BB2 + F_strong cherry"), the lottery value of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 7) is defined.

In the game lock lottery process using the game lock lottery table of the present embodiment, first, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 255) is set corresponding to each lock number. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) at a predetermined lock number, it means that the lock number has been won.

For example, when the winning number is "59" (abbreviation "F_BB5 + F_RT no transition lip"), the game lock of lock number 3 (no lock + next lock 3) or lock number 4 (no lock + next freeze) is selected. Will be done. If the winning number is "60" (abbreviated as "F_BB5 + F_SP lip"), lock number 5 (no lock + 1st freeze), lock number 6 (lock 1 + 1st freeze), and lock number 7 (lock 2+). One of the game locks (1st freeze) is selected.

When the winning numbers are from "61" to (abbreviation "F_BB4 + F_chance lip 1") to "88" (abbreviation "F_BB2 + F_strong cherry"), lock number 0 (no effect) to lock number 2 (lock 2) One of the game locks is selected.

Note that the lock number 0 (no effect) corresponds to a pattern in which the reel is not locked (normal reel acceleration processing). Further, the lock number 1 (lock 1) and the lock number 2 (lock 2) correspond to a lock effect pattern called "short lock". Further, the lock number 3 (no lock + next lock 3) to the lock number 7 (lock 2 + first freeze) correspond to a predetermined lock effect pattern, respectively.

[RT4 game state combo generation lottery table]
In the present embodiment, the game lock may be executed when the game of PREMIUM described later is performed in the RT4 game state (PTR described later). During the game lock in this PREMIUM game, a reel effect is performed triggered by the operation of the start lever 16 to notify the success or failure of the combo.

The "combo" in the present embodiment is "addition of the number of games in ART (PTR)", and if the combo is successful, a reel effect in which red 7 is lined up along the center line is performed, and the number of additional games is increased. Notified by the liquid crystal display device 11. On the other hand, if the combo fails, a reel effect is performed in which Red 7 does not line up along the center line.

The combo generation lottery table during the RT4 game state will be described with reference to FIG. 40.
The combo generation lottery table during the RT4 game state is used to determine the success or failure of the first (first) combo and the lock effect pattern for notifying the success or failure of the combo in each game of PREMIUM described later. The combo generation lottery table during the RT4 game state is specifically referred to in the combo generation lottery process during the game lock lottery process (see FIG. 169 described later) described later.

The combo generation lottery table in the RT4 game state defines a lottery value of the type of game lock (lock number) to be won according to the winning number (data pointer) determined by the internal lottery in the RT4 game state.

In the combo generation lottery process using the combo generation lottery table during the RT4 game state of the present embodiment, first, the effect random value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 255) is set to each lock number. The lottery value specified corresponding to is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) at a predetermined lock number, it means that the lock number has been won.

Note that the lock number 0 (off) corresponds to a pattern (normal reel acceleration processing) in which the reel effect (reel lock) related to the combo is not performed. The lock number 11 (one step off the fan) corresponds to the first combo failure lock effect pattern for notifying that the combo has failed. In the first combo failure lock effect pattern, for example, the reel rotates forward and the red 7 is likely to line up along the center line, so-called "fanning" is performed once, and then the red 7 is along the center line. It is a reel production that does not line up.

Further, the lock number 12 (out of two stages of fanning) corresponds to the second combo failure lock effect pattern for notifying that the combo has failed. In the second combo failure lock effect pattern, for example, the reel rotates in the reverse direction and the red 7 is likely to line up along the center line, so-called "fanning" is performed twice, and then the red 7 is along the center line. It is a reel production that does not line up.

The lock number 13 (successful forward stop combo) corresponds to the first combo success lock effect pattern for notifying that the combo has succeeded. The first combo success lock effect pattern is, for example, a reel effect in which the reels rotate forward and the red 7s are lined up along the center line. Further, the lock number 14 (successful reverse stop combo) corresponds to a second combo success lock effect pattern for notifying that the combo has succeeded. The second combo success lock effect pattern is, for example, a reel effect in which the reels rotate in the reverse direction and the red 7s are lined up along the center line.

[Combo continuation rate lottery table]
In the RT4 game state (PTR described later), if the PREMIUM game described later is performed and the first (first) combo succeeds, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to continue the combo, and the combo fails. Until then, the number of games in ART will continue to be added.

The combo continuation rate lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 41. The combo continuation rate lottery table is used in determining the combo continuation rate in the PREMIUM game described later. This combo continuation rate lottery table is specifically referred to in the combo continuation rate lottery process in the game lock lottery process (see FIG. 169 described later) described later.

The combo continuation rate lottery table defines a lottery value of the type of PRE loop rate to win according to the winning number (data pointer) determined by the internal lottery in the RT4 game state. In the combo continuation rate lottery process using the combo continuation rate lottery table of the present embodiment, first, the effect random value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 255) corresponds to each lock number. The lottery value specified in the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) at a predetermined PRE loop rate, it means that the PRE loop rate has been won.

[Combo continuous lottery table]
The combo continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 42. The combo continuous lottery table is used in determining whether or not to perform the combo succession rate in the PREMIUM game described later. Specifically, this combo continuous lottery table is referred to in the combo continuous lottery process during the game start lock process (see FIG. 171 described later) described later.

The combo continuous lottery table defines the lottery value of the type (lock number) of the game lock to be won according to the type of the PRE loop rate determined by the combo continuous lottery process.

In the combo continuous lottery process using the combo continuous lottery table of the present embodiment, first, the effect random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 255) is set corresponding to each lock number. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) at a predetermined lock number, it means that the lock number has been won.

The lock number 15 (revival) corresponds to a third combo success lock effect pattern for notifying that the combo has succeeded. The third combo success lock effect pattern is, for example, a reel effect in which the reels rotate forward and the red 7s do not line up along the center line, and then the reels rotate in the reverse direction and the red 7s line up along the center line.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 49. Although description is omitted here, storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in the above-mentioned various reel effects (various game locks) are also provided in the main RAM 53.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area, carry-over combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 62 represented by 1 byte of data.

When "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored) in each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 32, the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Is shown. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the combination of the symbols related to the winning and the combination of the symbols that triggers the transition to the RT gaming state are not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area (not shown). The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. 43. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 32, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with a carry-over combination storage area (not shown). Further, the carry-over combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the storage area 1 of the display combination storage area shown in FIG. 43. As a result of the internal lottery, any of "C_BB5", "C_BB4", "C_BB3", "C_BB2-1", "C_BB2-2", "C_BB1-1", "C_BB1-2", and "C_RB" as the internal winning combination When it is determined, the internal winning combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as a carry-over combination. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, "white 7"-"white 7"-"white 7" of "C_BB5") is displayed on the valid line. Is held without. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 44. Each of the game state flag storage areas is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Is shown. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the BB is being operated and the game state is the BB game state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main control unit 40 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code (symbol code storage area 1) of the reel that has been stopped most recently and the displayable combination (symbol code storage areas 2-33) are stored for each effective line. Reel. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2-33.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 38), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is logically producted with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically stacked data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 47. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided. Further, in this case, the effective line may be changed according to the number of BETs or the gaming state.

[Retract priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel, a pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel, and a pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel. That is, the pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel.

In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "19" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the above-mentioned stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 36) referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. .. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the draw-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined in the search order table (see FIG. 37) described above.

[Game lock flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game lock flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 49.
Each of the game lock flag storage areas is composed of game lock flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game lock flag, a unique lock number is assigned to each bit of the game lock flag storage areas 1 and 2.

In the present embodiment, when the lock number is determined with reference to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39), the combo generation lottery table during the RT4 game state (see FIG. 40), and the combo continuation lottery table (see FIG. 42). , The lock number is stored in the game lock flag storage area. For example, when the determined lock number is "1", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game lock flag storage area 1.

<Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the reel stop order will be described.

50 and 51 are tables showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) during BB non-carry-over (non-BB) and the stop order, and the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Indicates the type of display combination corresponding to the combination of. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, FIGS. 50 and 51 show only the internal winning combination in which the role of the internal winning combination in the game is different depending on the pushing order.

For example, when the data pointer is "2", the code names "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip), "RP06" (G_upper lip), "RP07" (G_middle lip) and "RP10" (G_specific lip) The internal winning combination according to 1) is duplicated (see FIG. 26). In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 50), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP06" (G_upper lip) is on the effective line. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the reels are "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 50), "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 50), "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 50). ), "Right-left middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 50) or "right middle left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 50), the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) The symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to is displayed as a stop on the effective line.

For example, when the data pointer is "44", the code names are "FR05" (G_9 bell 5), "FR09" (G_square cherry 1), "FR14" (G_L1st miss 1), "FR15" (G_L1st). Miss 2), "FR16" (G_L1st Miss 3), "FR17" (G_L1st Miss 4), "FR22" (G_C1st Miss 1), "FR23" (G_C1st Miss 2), "HZR01" (G_Bell Spill 1), The internal winning combinations related to "HZR02" (G_bell spill 2), "HZR03" (G_bell spill 3) and "HZR04" (G_bell spill 4) are duplicated (see FIG. 26).

In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 51), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "FR05" (G_9 bell 5) is on the effective line. It will be stopped and 9 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, the reels are "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 51), "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 51), "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 51). ”),“ Right / Left Middle ”(stop order“ 312 ”in FIG. 51) or“ Right Middle Left ”(stop order“ 321 ”in FIG. 51), the code name“ FR14 ”(G_L1st Miss 1) ), "FR15" (G_L1st Miss 2), "FR16" (G_L1st Miss 3), "FR17" (G_L1st Miss 4), "HZR01" (G_Bell Spill 1), "HZR02" (G_Bell Spill 2), " The symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to either "HZR03" (G_bell spill 3) or "HZR04" (G_bell spill 4) is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

FIG. 52 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) during carryover (during non-BB) of BB1 to BB4 and the stop order, and the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Indicates the type of display combination corresponding to. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, FIG. 52 shows only the internal winning combination in which the role of the internal winning combination in the game is different depending on the pushing order.

As shown in FIG. 52, during BB1 to BB4 carry-over (during non-BB), when the data pointers are “4” to “7” and “40” to “53”, the BB non-shown in FIGS. 50 and 51. Even if the push order is the same as during carry-over, the reel stop display mode is different.

For example, when the data pointer is "4", the internal winning combinations related to the code names "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip), "RP07" (G_middle lip) and "RP10" (G_specific lip 1) are duplicated. Win. In this case, if the reels are stopped in the order of "right, left, middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 51) or "right, middle, left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 50), the code name "RP07" (G_ The symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the middle lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, the reels are "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 50), "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 50), "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 50). ”) Or“ Middle right / left ”(stop order“ 231 ”in FIG. 50), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name“ RP03 ”(G_RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Reel.

When the data pointer is "40", the code names are "RP01" (G_RT1 migration lip 1), "RP02" (G_RT1 migration lip 2), "RP04" (G_RT3 migration lip), and "RP06" (G_ Upper rip), "RP07" (G_middle rip), "RP08" (G_lower rip), "RP09" (G_CU rip), "RP13" (G_chance rip 1), "RP17" (G_chance rip 5), "RP18" (G_SP Lip 5), "RP19" (G_Special Lip 1), "RP22" (G_Special Lip 4), "RP28" (G_Carrying Lip 1), "RP29" (G_Carrying Lip 2) , "RP30" (G_carry-over rip 3), "RP31" (G_carry-over rip 4) and "RP32" (G_carry-over rip 5) are duplicate winning combinations.

In this case, no matter which push order the reels are stopped, the code names "RP28" (G_carrying lip 1), "RP29" (G_carrying lip 2), "RP30" (G_carrying lip 3), The symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "RP31" (G_carrying lip 4) and "RP32" (G_carrying lip 5) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. If the data pointer is "40" while the BB is not carried over, "RP06" (G_upper lip), "RP07" (G_middle lip), "RP08" (G_lower lip), "RP09" ( The symbol combination related to any of G_CU lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

When the data pointer is "42", the code names are "FR03" (G_9 bell 3), "FR05" (G_9 bell 5), "FR14" (G_L1st miss 1), and "FR15" (G_L1st). Miss 2), "FR16" (G_L1st Miss 3), "FR17" (G_L1st Miss 4), "FR22" (G_C1st Miss 1), "FR23" (G_C1st Miss 2), "HZR01" (G_Bell Spill 1), The internal winning combinations related to "HZR02" (G_bell spill 2), "HZR03" (G_bell spill 4) and "HZR04" (G_bell spill 4) are duplicated.

In this case, regardless of which push order the reels are stopped, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "FR03" (G_9 bell 3) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. If the data pointer is "42" during non-carryover of BB, if the reels are stopped in the order of "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 51), the code name "FR05" (G_9) The symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to the sheet bell 5) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, the reels are "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 51), "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 51), "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 51". ), "Right-left middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 51) or "right middle left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 51), "FR14" (G_L1st miss 1), " "FR15" (G_L1st Miss 2), "FR16" (G_L1st Miss 3), "FR17" (G_L1st Miss 4), "HZR01" (G_Bell Spill 1), "HZR02" (G_Bell Spill 2), "HZR03" ( The symbol combination according to any of G_bell spill 4) and "HZR04" (G_bell spill 4) is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

FIG. 53 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) during BB5 carry-over (during non-BB) and the stop order, and corresponds to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Indicates the type of display role to be played. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, FIG. 53 shows only the internal winning combination in which the role of the internal winning combination in the game is different depending on the pushing order.

As shown in FIG. 53, in BB5 carry-over (non-BB), when the data pointers are “4” to “7” and “39” to “53”, BB is not carried over as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51. Even if the push order is the same as, the reel stop display mode is different.

When the data pointer during BB5 carry-over (non-BB) is "4" to "7" and "40" to "53", the data pointer during BB1 to BB4 carry-over (non-BB) is "4". The stopping mode related to the pushing order is the same as in the cases of "7" and "40" to "53".

For example, when the data pointer is "39", the code names are "RP06" (G_upper lip), "RP07" (G_middle lip), "RP08" (G_lower lip), "RP09" (G_CU lip). , "RP18" (G_SP rip), "RP19" (G_special rip 1), "RP22" (G_special rip 4) and "RP25" (G_special rip 7), the internal winning combination is duplicated (Fig. 26). reference). In this case, regardless of which push order the reels are stopped, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP07" (G_middle lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

If the data pointer is "39" during non-carryover of BB, the reels are set to "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 51) or "left and right middle" (stop order "in FIG. 51"). When stopped in the order of "132"), the symbol combination related to any of the code names "FR06" (G_upper lip), "RP08" (G_lower lip), and "RP09" (G_CU lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Will be done. On the other hand, the reels are "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 51), "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 51), "right left middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 51 ". ) Or "Right, middle, left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 51), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP07" (G_middle lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Reel.

If the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "2" during the carry-over of BB1 to BB5 won during ART, the stop order is "right / left middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 51). Notify. When the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3", "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 50) is notified as the stop order. When the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "4", the stop order "right / left middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 51) is notified.

In addition, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "5" during the carry-over of BB1 to BB5 won during ART, the stop order is "right, middle, left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 50). Is notified. When the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "6", "middle left / right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 50) is notified as the stop order. When the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "7", "middle right / left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 50) is notified as the stop order.

If the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "2" to "7" during the carry-over of BB1 to BB5 that were won during ART, and the stop operations are performed in the above-mentioned stop order, the code name is "FR06". The symbol combination related to (G_upper lip) or "RP07" (G_middle lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

During BB1 to BB5 carryover during ART, the above-mentioned stop order is notified (navigation), and the symbol combination related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) during non-carryover of BB1 to BB5 during ART is on the valid line. This is the same as the notification for avoiding the stop display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being determined that BB1 to BB5 are being carried over during ART by not giving a sense of discomfort due to the above-mentioned notification being stopped.

FIG. 54 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination (data pointer) during RB carry-over during BB and the stop order, and is a display combination corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Indicates the type of. In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, FIG. 54 shows only the internal winning combination in which the role of the internal winning combination in the game is different depending on the pushing order.

As shown in FIG. 54, during RB carryover during BB, when the data pointers are “2” to “13”, even if the push order is the same as during BB non-carryover shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the reels The stop display mode is different.

As described above, when the data pointer is "2", the code names "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip), "RP06" (G_upper lip), "RP07" (G_middle lip) and "RP10" ( The internal winning combination related to G_specific lip 1) is duplicated (see FIG. 26).

For example, during RB carryover during BB, when the data pointer is "2", the reel is set to "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 54) or "left and right middle" (stop order in FIG. 54). When stopped in the order of "132"), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP10" (G_specific lip 1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Further, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 54), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Will be done.

Further, when the data pointer is "8" during RB carryover during BB, the reels are set to "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 54), "right left middle" (stop order "in FIG. 54"). When stopped in the order of "312") or "right middle left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 54), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP07" (G_middle lip) stops on the valid line. Is displayed.

When the data pointer is "8", the code names are "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip), "RP04" (G_RT3 transition lip), "RP06" (G_upper lip), "RP07" (G_middle lip). ), "RP08" (G_lower rip), "RP10" (G_specific rip 1), "RP11" (G_specific rip 2) and "RP12" (G_specific rip 3), the internal winning combination is duplicated ( See FIG. 26).

For example, during RB carryover during BB, when the data pointer is "8", the reels are set to "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 54) or "left and right middle" (stop order in FIG. 54). When stopped in the order of "132"), the symbol combination related to any of "RP10" (G_specific lip 1), "RP11" (G_specific lip 2), and "RP12" (G_specific lip 3) is on the effective line. Is stopped and displayed. Further, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 54), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Will be done.

Further, when the data pointer is "8" during RB carryover during BB, the reels are set to "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 54), "right left middle" (stop order "in FIG. 54"). When stopped in the order of "312") or "right middle left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 54), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP07" (G_middle lip) stops on the valid line. Is displayed.

If the data pointer is "8" during non-carryover of BB, if the reels are stopped in the order of "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 50), the code name "RP04" (G_RT3) The symbol combination related to the transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Further, when the reels are stopped in the order of "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 51), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP06" (G_upper lip) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Will be done.

When the data pointer is "8" during non-carryover of BB, the reels are set to "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 51) and "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 51). ”),“ Right / Left Middle ”(stop order“ 312 ”in FIG. 51) or“ Right Middle Left ”(stop order“ 321 ”in FIG. 51), the code name“ RP03 ”(G_RT2 transition lip” ) Is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

In the present embodiment, the F_RT4 specific lip (“RP10” (G_specific lip 1), “RP11” (G_specific lip 2), “RP12” (G_specific lip 3)) is won by lottery during the BB. It is determined whether or not to stop and display the symbol combination related to the F_RT4 specific lip (whether or not to perform navigation) according to the points (FS points and EX points described later).

For the navigation for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the F_RT4 specific lip, points of a certain value or more must be determined. Therefore, when the symbol combination related to the F_RT4 specific lip is stopped and displayed, points of a certain value or more are added. In this way, the stop display of the symbol combination related to the F_RT4 specific lip is one of the effects suggesting that points of a certain value or more are added.

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the reel stop order, and the RT shift will be described. FIG. 55 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination (data pointer), the reel stop order, and the RT transition, and the transition destination of the RT gaming state corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the reel stop order. Is shown.

The "maintenance replay" shown in FIG. 55 is a replay that is not a transition role of the RT gaming state, and the code names of the present embodiment are "RP06" (G_upper rip), "RP07" (G_middle rip), and "RP08" ( It corresponds to G_lower lip) and "RP09" (G_CU lip). Further, the "RT1 transition replay" is a replay set as a transition role for shifting the RT game state to the RT1 game state, and the code names "RP01" (G_RT1 transition lip 1) and "RP02" (RP02) of the present embodiment. Corresponds to G_RT1 transition lip 2).

The "RT2 transition replay" is a replay set as a transition combination that shifts the RT gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and corresponds to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) of the present embodiment. Further, the "RT3 transition replay" is a replay set as a transition combination for shifting the RT gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and corresponds to the code name "RP04" (G_RT3 transition lip) of the present embodiment.

The "RT4 transition replay" is a replay set as a transition combination that shifts the RT gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and corresponds to the code name "RP05" (G_RT4 transition lip) of the present embodiment. Further, the "specific replay" is a replay combination related to a stop mode in which two or more "replay 3" symbols are stopped and displayed along a linear line connecting each display area, and is a replay combination of the present embodiment. It corresponds to the code names "RP10" (G_specific lip 1), "RP11" (G_specific lip 2), and "RP12" (G_specific lip 3).

"White 7 fanning" is a replay related to a stop mode in which two "white 7" symbols are lined up along a straight line connecting each display area when the stop operation timing is the first timing. It is a role. This "white 7 fan" corresponds to the code names "RP25" (G_special lip 7), "RP26" (G_special lip 8), and "RP27" (G_special lip 9) of the present embodiment. In the stop control related to "white 7 fanning", it is expected that three "white 7" symbols are lined up along the straight line connecting each display area, but the three "white 7" symbols are not lined up. It becomes a stop mode.

"White 7 alignment" is a replay related to a stop mode in which three "white 7" symbols are lined up along a linear line connecting each display area when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing. It is a role. This "white 7 set" corresponds to the code names "RP22" (G_special lip 4), "RP23" (G_special lip 5), and "RP24" (G_special lip 6) of the present embodiment.

"Red 7 fanning" is a replay related to a stop mode in which two "Red 7" symbols are lined up along a linear line connecting each display area when the timing of the stop operation is the second timing. It is a role. This "red 7 fan" corresponds to the code names "RP17" (G_chance lip 5) and "RP21" (G_special lip 3) of the present embodiment. In the stop control related to "Red 7 fanning", it is expected that three "Red 7" symbols are lined up along the straight line connecting each display area, but the three "Red 7" symbols are not lined up. It becomes a stop mode.

"Red 7 alignment" is a replay related to a stop mode in which three "Red 7" symbols are lined up along a straight line connecting each display area when the timing of the stop operation is the second timing. It is a role. This "red 7 set" corresponds to the code names "RP19" (G_special lip 1) and "RP20" (G_special lip 2) of this embodiment.

For example, when the data pointer is "2" (abbreviated as "F_RT01 maintenance lip 1") during non-BB carry-over, the reels are "left middle right" (stop order in FIG. 55) as described in FIG. When stopped in the order of "123"), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "maintenance replay (code name" RP06 "(G_upper rip))" is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Since this display combination is not a transition combination of the RT game state, the RT game state does not shift in this case.

On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in an order other than "left, middle, right", the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "RT2 transition replay (code name" RP03 "(G_RT2 transition lip))" is stopped and displayed on the valid line. .. Since this display combination is a transition combination that shifts the RT gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 13), in this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

Further, for example, when the data pointer is "10" (abbreviated as "F_RT3 transition lip 3") during non-BB carry-over, the reels are moved in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 55). When stopped, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "RT3 transition replay (code name" RP04 "(G_RT3 transition lip))" is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Since this display combination is a transition combination that shifts the RT gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 13), in this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in an order other than "middle left and right", the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "RT2 transition replay (code name" RP03 "(G_RT2 transition lip))" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and RT The gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

Further, for example, when the data pointer is "25" (abbreviation "F_RT4 specific lip 1") during non-BB carry-over, the reel is set to "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 55) or ". When stopped in the order of "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 55), the inside related to "specific replay (code name" RP10 "(G_specific lip 1) or" RP11 "(G_specific lip 2))" The symbol combination of the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. This display combination is a combination that is a condition for setting the high probability state described later.

Further, for example, when the data pointer is "31" (abbreviation "F_RT4 special lip 1") during non-BB carry-over, the reel is set to "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 55) or ". When the stop operation timing is stopped at the first timing in the order of "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 55), "white 7 fanning (code name" RP25 "(G_special lip 7)", " The symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "RP26" (G_special lip 8) or "RP27" (G_special lip 9)) "is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 55), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "maintenance replay (code name" RP09 "(G_CU lip))" is effective. Stop is displayed on the line. Further, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 55), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "specific replay (code name" RP10 "(G_specific lip 1))". Is stopped and displayed on the valid line.

Then, the reels are placed in the order of "right, left, middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 55) or "right, middle, left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 55), and the stop operation timing is the second timing. When stopped at, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "Red 7 alignment (code name" RP19 "(G_special lip 1))" is stopped and displayed on the valid line.

<Game flow>
Next, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition operation between the RT gaming states in various RT gaming states controlled by the main control unit 40 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. Note that FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the RT gaming state controlled by the main control unit 40.

Further, the various code names showing the transitional combination that triggers the transition of the RT gaming state described in FIG. 53 correspond to, for example, the code names defined in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. 8 to 11.

[Transition flow of RT game state]
In the present embodiment, as described above, five types of RT game states are provided, from the RT0 game state to the RT4 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other.

(1) RT0 gaming state The RT0 gaming state is an RT gaming state set in the initial state, and is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is low.

In the RT0 gaming state, the symbol combinations related to the code names "HZR01" (G_bell spilled eyes 1) to "HZR04" (G_bell spilled eyes 4) may be displayed. This bell spilled eye (code name "HZR01" (G_bell spilled eye 1) to "HZR04" (G_bell spilled eye 4)), that is, the symbol combination related to the "bell spilled eye" is an opportunity to shift to the RT1 gaming state. It becomes.

In the present embodiment, in the RT0 game state, the small winning combination (9-card bell combination) related to the "bell" in which the number of medals paid out is 9, and the push order failure combination described later are overlapped. Then, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/6 in this embodiment), the 9-bell role wins and the RT game state does not shift.

On the other hand, when the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), the symbol combination related to the pressing order failure combination or the bell spilled eye is displayed. If the push order failure combination wins, the RT game state does not shift. If a bell spill is displayed, the game shifts to the RT1 game state.

Further, in the RT0 game state, the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) may be determined. The symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) serves as a transition trigger (transition combination) to the RT2 gaming state.

(2) RT1 game state The RT1 game state is a game state in which the probability of winning a replay is high.
In the RT1 game state, the internal winning combination (pushing order failure combination) related to the code names “FR14” (G_L1st miss 1) to “FR31” (G_R1st miss 6) may be determined. In addition, the symbol combination of the push order failure combination serves as an opportunity (transition combination) to shift to the RT0 gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT1 game state, in the state where the push order failure combination is internally won, the 9-card bell combination (small combination related to the bell in which 9 medals are paid out) is duplicated. Then, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/6 in this embodiment), the 9-bell role wins and the RT game state does not shift.

On the other hand, when the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), the symbol combination related to the pressing order failure combination or the bell spilled eye is displayed. If the push order failure combination is won, the player shifts to the RT0 game state, and if a bell spill is displayed, the player shifts to the RT1 game state.

Further, in the RT1 game state, the internal winning combination (RT2 transition replay) related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) may be determined. In addition, the symbol combination of the RT2 transition replay serves as a transition trigger (transition role) to the RT2 game state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT1 game state, the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) also overlaps in the state where the RT2 transition replay is internally won. Then, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is the correct answer (probability of 1/6 in this embodiment), the maintenance replay wins and the RT game state does not shift. On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), the RT2 transition replay wins and the RT2 game state is entered.

Further, in the RT1 game state, the internal winning combination (RT3 transition replay) related to the code name "RP04" (G_RT3 transition lip) may be determined. In addition, the symbol combination of the RT3 transition replay serves as a transition trigger (transition role) to the RT3 game state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT1 game state, the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) and the RT2 transition replay also overlap in the state where the RT3 transition replay is internally won. Then, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is the correct answer (probability of 1/6 in this embodiment), the RT3 transition replay wins and the RT3 gaming state is entered.

On the other hand, if the stop button pressing order is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) or the RT2 transition replay wins a prize. If the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) wins, the RT game state does not shift, and if the RT2 transition replay wins, the RT2 game state shifts.

(3) RT2 game state The RT2 game state is a game state in which the probability of winning a replay is low.
In the RT2 game state, the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) may be determined, but the internal winning combination corresponding to the symbol combination that triggers the transition to another RT gaming state is determined. Not done. In this RT2 game state, the transition to the RT0 game state is triggered by digesting the specified number of games (for example, 20 games).

(4) RT3 game state The RT3 game state is a game state in which the probability of winning a replay is high.
In the RT3 game state, the push order failure role, the 9-card bell role, and the bell spilled eye are duplicated and determined as the internal winning combination. Then, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/6 in this embodiment), the 9-bell role wins and the RT game state does not shift.

On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), a winning combination of the pressing order failure combination or a bell spill is displayed according to the timing of the stop operation. If the push order failure combination is won, the player shifts to the RT0 game state, and if a bell spill is displayed, the player shifts to the RT1 game state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT3 game state, the RT1 transition replay, the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition), and the specific replay are duplicated as internal winning combinations. The specific replay is an internal winning combination related to the code names "RP10" (G_specific lip 1) to "RP12" (G_specific lip 3) shown in FIG. 56.

In this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/6 in this embodiment), the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) wins, and the RT game state does not shift. On the other hand, if the stop button pressing order is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), the RT1 transition replay or the specific replay is won. When the RT1 transition replay wins, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state, and when a specific replay wins, the RT gaming state does not shift.

In this embodiment, if the RT1 transition replay, the maintenance replay, and the specific replay are duplicated as the internal winning combination, the maintenance replay wins with a probability of 1/6 (correct answer in push order), and a probability of 2/3 ( The RT1 transition replay wins with a push order incorrect answer), and the specific replay wins with a 1/6 probability (push order incorrect answer).

Further, in the RT3 game state, the internal winning combination (RT4 transition replay) related to the code name "RP05" (G_RT4 transition lip) may be determined. In addition, the symbol combination of the RT4 transition replay serves as a transition trigger (transition role) to the RT4 game state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT3 game state, the RT4 transition replay, the maintenance replay (replay without the RT transition), the RT1 transition replay, and the specific replay are duplicated as internal winning combinations.

In this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/5 in this embodiment), the RT4 transition replay wins and the RT4 game state is entered. On the other hand, if the stop button pressing order is incorrect (probability of 4/5 in this embodiment), the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition), RT1 transition replay, or specific replay wins a prize. If the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) or the specific replay wins, the RT game state does not shift, and if the RT1 transition replay wins, the RT1 game state shifts.

(5) RT4 game state The RT4 game state is a game state in which the probability of winning a replay is high.
In the RT3 game state, the push order failure role, the 9-card bell role, and the bell spilled eye are duplicated and determined as the internal winning combination. Then, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/6 in this embodiment), the 9-bell role wins and the RT game state does not shift.

On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), the pressing order failure combination or the bell spilled eye wins according to the timing of the stop operation. If the push order failure combination wins, it shifts to the RT0 game state, and if the bell spilled eye wins, it shifts to the RT1 game state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT4 game state, the RT3 transition replay, the specific replay, and the maintenance replay (replay without the RT transition) are duplicated as internal winning combinations. In this case, the RT3 transition replay wins with a probability of 1/2 (pushing order), and the RT3 game state is entered. In addition, the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) wins with a probability of 1/6 (push order), and the RT game state does not shift. In addition, the specific replay wins with a probability of 1/3 (pushing order), and the RT game state does not shift.

Further, in the RT4 game state, the internal winning combination (special replay) related to the code names "RP19" (G_special lip 1) to "RP27" (G_special lip 9) may be determined. Further, in the RT4 game state, the internal winning combination (chance replay) related to the code names "RP13" (G_chance lip 1) to "RP17" (G_chance lip 5) may be determined.

In the present embodiment, in the RT4 game state, special replay, chance replay, specific replay, and maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) are duplicated as internal winning roles. In this case, the specific replay wins with a probability of 1/6 (push order), and the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) wins with a probability of 1/6 (push order).

In addition, a special replay wins with a 1/3 probability (push order). When the special replay wins, for example, "red 7" and "white 7" are stopped and displayed along the center line, which is a line connecting the middle stages of each symbol display area, and the cross-up line.

In addition, chance replay wins with a probability of 1/3 (push order). This combination of chance replay symbols is in a display mode in which, for example, "red 7" and "white 7" are stopped and displayed along the center line when the second stop operation is completed. Then, the stop symbol along the center line of the reel to be stopped in the third stop operation is a symbol other than "red 7" and "white 7". That is, when the chance replay wins, it is a fake production with "Red 7" and "White 7".

During the BB carry-over shown in FIG. 56, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is different from the RT1 to RT4 gaming states. That is, during the BB carry-over, the internal winning combination is determined with reference to the internal lottery table for the general game state (during the BB carry-over).

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, during BB, it is in either the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state. When BB is started, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. Then, when the RB wins and the RB is being carried over, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. Further, when the RB game state ends, the RT game state shifts to the RT0 game state.

When the BB ends, the RT gaming state at that time is maintained, and the game returns to the general gaming state. That is, when the BB ends during the RT0 gaming state, the RT0 gaming state is entered in the general gaming state. On the other hand, when the BB ends during the RT1 gaming state during the RB carry-over, the RT1 gaming state is set to the general gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, when the RB is won, a stop operation is notified so that the RB symbol assembly is not stopped and displayed, the transition to the RT0 gaming state is avoided, and the RB is in the RT1 gaming state during the carry-over. To end BB.

During the RT0 game state during BB and during the RT1 game state during RB carry-over, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is during the RT1 game state that is not in BB and in the RT1 game state that is not during BB (RB carry-over). Different from inside. That is, during the RT0 gaming state in the BB, the internal winning combination is determined with reference to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT0 BB general). Further, during the RT1 game state during the RB carry-over, the internal winning combination is determined with reference to the internal lottery table for the general game state (RT1 RB carry-over).

<Explanation of sub-game state>
Next, the sub-game state will be described with reference to FIG. 57.
In the present embodiment, various gaming states related to the effect controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) are referred to as "sub gaming states". In the present embodiment, the normal state, CZ (chance zone), MICHI, R_ART, PTR, and RTG are set as the sub-game states.

[Normal state]
In the normal state, an internal lottery is performed for each game with reference to the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 15 to 18) to determine whether or not the BB wins.

When BB1 to BB4 win in the internal lottery in the normal state and the symbol combination corresponding to each BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-game state shifts to CZ (chance zone). On the other hand, when the BB5 wins in the internal lottery in the normal state and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB5 is stopped and displayed, the sub-game state shifts to MICHI.

Further, in the normal state, the winning probability of ART in BB (CZ) is usually a low probability state, and when a specific replay wins, a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) are consumed. It becomes a high probability state. During the high probability state, the winning probability of ART in BB (CZ) becomes a specific probability higher than a predetermined probability. That is, the winning probability of ART is higher when the BB is won during the high probability state than when the BB is won during the low probability state.

In the present embodiment, the winning probabilities of ART in the low-probability state and the high-probability state BB (CZ) are different, but the pachislot of the present invention has a rare role or a bell in the low-probability state and the high-probability state. The probability that the winning combination will win may be different. The "rare role" in this embodiment means the winning numbers "37", "38", "55", "56", "57", and "58", and is basically used for replays and bells. It is a role with a lower winning probability than the internal winning combination.

[CZ (Chance Zone)]
CZ is a sub-game state executed during BB1 to BB4. During BB, the RT0 game state or the RT1 game state is set, and the RT1 game state is the RB carry-over state (see FIG. 56). If the BB ends during the carry-over of the RB, the RB right (winning) becomes invalid. Moreover, when BB ends, CZ ends.

During CZ, FS points are awarded by satisfying predetermined conditions. Then, when the total of the FS points given during the CZ reaches a specified value (for example, 100 points), the transfer of R_ART is determined. If the FS points do not reach the specified value and the CZ ends, an ART lottery is performed based on the total of the FS points given up to that point, and if the FS points are won, the transfer of R_ART is determined.

If the transition of R_ART is not determined in CZ, the transition to the normal state is performed. That is, when R_ART is not determined during BB1 to BB4, the sub-game state after the end of BB is shifted from CZ to the normal state.

The BB ends on the condition that 44 or more medals have been paid out. On the other hand, when the combination of 9 bells is displayed, 9 medals (game media) are paid out. Therefore, when the symbol combination of the 9-card bell role is displayed 5 times, 45 medals will be paid out and the BB will end.

If the BB is terminated by displaying the symbol combination of the 9-card bell combination 5 times, the termination condition of the BB may be any of 37 to 43 medals. However, for example, if the end condition of BB is set to pay out 37 medals, the symbol combination of other roles (rare roles) is displayed, 2 to 4 medals are paid out, and the symbols of 9 bell roles are displayed. There is a possibility that the BB will end when the combination is displayed four times. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the BB is set to 44 medals (or more), which is close to the total number of medals obtained when the symbol combination of the 9-card bell combination is displayed 5 times. It is possible to increase the number of times that the display of the symbol combination of (rare role) is allowed. Further, even if a rare role is won during the BB, the end time of the BB can be prevented from being advanced, and the interest of the game can be prevented from being lowered.

[MICHI]
MICHI is a sub-game state executed during BB5. When the sub-game state is shifted to MICHI, it is determined to shift to R_ART after the end of MICHI (BB5). It is also decided to shift from R_ART to PTR.

[R_ART]
R_ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT3 game state. During R_ART, EX points are awarded by satisfying predetermined conditions. Further, R_ART is composed of "LV.1" to "LV.4" and "PTR" to which a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) are assigned.

When a predetermined number of games are exhausted in each LV (level) and the total of EX points reaches a specified value (for example, 100 points), the LV (level) is increased (promoted). On the other hand, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted in each LV (level) and the total of EX points does not reach the specified value, the LV (level) is down (demoted).

For example, if the total number of EX points reaches the specified value when the predetermined number of games is exhausted in "LV.3", the number is increased to "LV.4". On the other hand, if the total number of EX points does not reach the specified value when the predetermined number of games is exhausted in "LV.3", the number is reduced to "LV.2".

If the total number of EX points does not reach the specified value when the predetermined number of games is exhausted in "LV.1", R_ART ends and the sub-game state shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted in "LV.4" and the total of EX points reaches the specified value, it is determined to start "PTR".

In the "PTR", first, "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING" or "BURNING" is started, and the initial number of games of the "PTR" is determined. The determined initial number of games is set in the PTR game number counter, and when the PTR game number counter becomes "0", "PTR" ends.

In "PREMIUM", a predetermined number of games is given when "Red 7" can be aligned along the center line between the first number of games (for example, 10 games). If the "Red 7" can be aligned along the center line, the combo generation lottery is performed with reference to the above-mentioned RT4 game state combo generation lottery table (see FIG. 40). Then, when the success of the combo (addition of the number of games in the PTR) is determined, the addition of a specific number of games (for example, 123 games) is determined. That is, a specific number of games is added to the PTR game number counter.

In "FIGHTING", each time a specific replay symbol combination (for example, "watermelon"-"replay 3"-"bell 1" ("replay 3" is aligned along the crossdown line)) is displayed, it is determined in advance. The addition of the number of one game out of the plurality of games (for example, 10 games, 30 games, 50 games) is determined. That is, the number of one game out of a plurality of predetermined numbers of games is added to the PTR game number counter.

It should be noted that "FIGHTING" ends when the stop-displayed reel reaches a specific display mode. As a specific display mode, for example, "Replay 1" or "Replay 2" is displayed in the middle stage area corresponding to the left reel 3L, the lower stage area corresponding to the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area corresponding to the right reel 3R. Display mode can be mentioned.

"BURNING" ends when the second number of games (for example, 5 games) is exhausted. In this "BURNING", the number of games to be added is determined according to the type of the internal winning combination (or display combination) in each game. Then, the determined additional game is added to the PTR game number counter.

Further, even during "PTR", EX points are awarded by satisfying a predetermined condition. Then, when the total of EX points reaches the specified value during "PTR", it is decided to start "B_RUSH".

"B_RUSH" sets the number of third games (for example, three games) as one set, and notifies the number of additional games determined by lottery in each game. Then, the game with the number of games added to one set is continued until the continuous lottery is lost.

As shown in FIG. 57, when shifting from CZ to R_ART, it starts from "LV.3" of R_ART. Therefore, even if R_ART ends without leveling up even once, the number of R_ART games is three times or more the predetermined number of games.

On the other hand, when MICHI shifts to R_ART, it is decided to start from "LV.1" of R_ART, and to level up to "LV.4" and start "PTR". Therefore, the number of R_ART games in the transition from MICHI to R_ART is at least eight times or more the predetermined number of games combined with the number of games digested in the "PTR".

[RTG]
RTG is a sub-game state executed during the RT4 game state. The RTG is given (stocked) with "PTR" every time "White 7" is aligned along the center line between the fourth number of games (for example, 20 games). Further, when the RTG ends, the sub-game state is shifted to R_ART, and "PTR" is started. The initial number of games of "PTR" in this case is set to a predetermined value (50 games) set in advance.

<Structure of data table stored in sub ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the sub ROM 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 164.

[Specific mode MAP lottery table when changing settings]
First, the specific mode MAP lottery table at the time of setting change will be described. The specific mode MAP lottery table at the time of setting change is used when the specific mode MAP lottery is performed in the setting change processing.

The specific mode MAP lottery table at the time of setting change defines the correspondence between the map type set for each set value and the lottery value.

At the time of setting change In the specific mode MAP lottery process using the specific mode MAP lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used. At the time of setting change, the lottery value of the map type specified in the specific mode MAP lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the map type at that time is won.

[Next specific mode MAP lottery table]
Next, the next specific mode MAP lottery table will be described. The next specific mode MAP lottery table is used when the next specific mode map type lottery is performed in the normal processing described later.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the configuration of the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) (No. 1). Further, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the configuration of the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) (No. 2). The next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) is referred to when the current MAP type is "MAP1".

In this embodiment, MAPs 1 to 20 are set as the type of MAP, and the next specific mode MAP lottery table corresponding to each of MAPs 1 to 20 is provided. However, since the next specific mode MAP lottery table for each MAP has the same configuration, here, the next specific mode MAP lottery table for MAP1 (see FIGS. 59 and 60) is extracted, and the next time for MAP2 and later. The figure and description which show the specific mode MAP lottery table are omitted.

The next specific mode MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the map type set for each mode type and the set value and the lottery value.

In the next specific mode MAP lottery process using the specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. , Next time, the lottery value of the map type specified in the specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the map type at that time is won.

[Specific mode transition lottery table]
Next, the specific mode transition lottery table will be described. The specific mode transition lottery table is used when the specific mode transition lottery is performed next time in the normal processing described later.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a configuration of a specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) (No. 1). Further, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a configuration of a specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) (No. 2). The specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) is referred to when the current mode type is "mode A".

In this embodiment, modes A to E are set as the types of specific modes. Modes A to E make the values of the initial FS points described later different (see FIG. 66 described later). Then, the winning probability of R_ART in CZ is different because the value of the initial FS point is different. That is, if the value of the initial FS points is large, the total of the FS points tends to reach a specified value (for example, 100 points), so that the probability of winning R_ART in CZ increases. In addition, if the total of FS points does not reach the specified value and CZ ends, ART lottery is performed based on the total of FS points given so far. Therefore, if the value of the initial FS points is large, R_ART The winning probability of is high.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific mode transition lottery table corresponding to each of modes A to E is provided. However, since the specific mode transition lottery table for each mode has the same configuration, here, the specific mode transition lottery table for mode A (see FIGS. 61 and 62) is extracted, and modes B, C, and D are extracted. , The figure and description which show the specific mode transition lottery table for E are omitted.

The specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) defines the correspondence between the mode type set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value and the lottery value.

In the specific mode transition lottery process using the specific mode transition lottery table (mode A), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. , The lottery value of the mode type specified in the specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the mode type at that time is won.

[High accuracy stock lottery table]
Next, the high-accuracy stock lottery table will be described. The high-accuracy stock lottery table is used when performing high-accuracy stock lottery in the 3OFF processing described later.
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the configuration of a high-accuracy stock lottery table.

The high-accuracy stock lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of high-accuracy stocks set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value and the lottery value.

In the high-accuracy stock lottery process using the high-accuracy stock lottery table, first, the random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) are stored in the high-accuracy stock. The lottery value of the number of highly accurate stocks specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the high probability stock number at that time has been won.

[ART lottery table]
Next, the ART lottery table will be described. The ART lottery table is used when performing an ART lottery in the normal processing described later.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART lottery table (without high-accuracy stock). This ART lottery table (without high probability stock) is referred to when there is no high probability stock, that is, when there is a low probability state.
Further, FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART lottery table (with high-accuracy stock). This ART lottery table (with high probability stock) is referred to when there is high probability stock, that is, when there is a high probability state.

The ART lottery table (without high-accuracy stock) and the ART lottery table (with high-accuracy stock) are the winning / non-winning (missing) of ART and the lottery value set for each type and set value of the internal winning combination. Prescribe the correspondence of.

In the ART lottery process using the ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is specified in the high-accuracy stock lottery table. The winning / non-winning (missing) lottery values of the ART are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning or non-winning (missing) of ART at that time is won.

[CZ initial FS point lottery table]
Next, the CZ initial FS point lottery table will be described. The CZ initial FS point lottery table is used when the CZ initial FS point lottery is performed in the normal intermediate processing described later.
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a configuration of a CZ initial FS point lottery table.

The CZ initial FS point lottery table defines the correspondence between the FS points set for each mode type and set value and the lottery value.

In the CZ initial FS point lottery process using the CZ initial FS point lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is converted into CZ. The lottery value of the FS points specified in the initial FS point lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the FS point at that time is won.

[Lottery table for earning FS points during CZ]
Next, the FS point acquisition lottery table in CZ will be described. The CZ medium FS point acquisition lottery table is used when the CZ medium FS point acquisition lottery is performed in the CZ medium processing described later.
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the configuration of the FS point acquisition lottery table in CZ.

The FS point acquisition lottery table in CZ defines the correspondence between the FS points set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value, and the lottery value.

In the CZ medium FS point acquisition lottery process using the CZ medium FS point acquisition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. , The lottery value of the FS points specified in the FS point acquisition lottery table in CZ is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the FS point at that time is won.

[ART lottery table at the end of CZ]
Next, the ART lottery table at the end of CZ will be described. The CZ end-end ART lottery table is used when the CZ-end end ART lottery is performed in the CZ intermediate processing described later.
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table at the end of CZ.

The ART lottery table at the end of CZ defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (missing) of ART set for each FS point and the set value and the lottery value.

In the CZ end ART lottery process using the CZ end ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is converted into CZ. At the end, the winning and non-winning (missing) lottery values of ART specified in the ART lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning or non-winning (missing) of ART at that time is won.

[High accuracy stock lottery table at the end of CZ]
Next, the high-accuracy stock lottery table at the end of CZ will be described. The CZ end high accuracy stock lottery table is used when the CZ end high accuracy stock lottery is performed in the BB end process described later.
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the configuration of a high-accuracy stock lottery table at the end of CZ.

The high-accuracy stock lottery table at the end of CZ defines the correspondence between the high-accuracy stock number set for each type of RT game state and the set value and the lottery value.

In the high-accuracy stock lottery process at the end of CZ using the high-accuracy stock lottery table at the end of CZ, first, the random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the winning / non-winning (missing) lottery values of ART specified in the high-accuracy stock lottery table at the end of CZ. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the high probability stock number at that time has been won.

[PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified points in CZ]
Next, the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point in CZ will be described. The PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point in CZ is used when the PTR stock lottery is performed after reaching the specified point in CZ in the CZ processing described later.
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a configuration of a PTR stock lottery table after reaching a specified point in CZ.

After reaching the specified point in CZ, the PTR stock lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (missing) of the PTR stock set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value, and the lottery value.

In the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the specified point in CZ using the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point in CZ, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). After reaching the specified point in CZ, the extracted random number values are sequentially subtracted by the winning / non-winning (missing) lottery values of the PTR stock specified in the PTR stock lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning or non-winning (missing) of the PTR stock at that time is won.

[ART grade lottery table]
Next, the ART grade lottery table will be described. The ART grade lottery table is used when performing ART grade lottery in the CZ processing described later.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART grade lottery table (CZ). This ART grade lottery table (CZ) is referenced when in CZ.
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART grade lottery table (RTG). This ART grade lottery table (RTG) is referenced when in RTG.
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART grade lottery table (BB5). This ART grade lottery table (BB5) is referred to when in BB5.

In this embodiment, grades A to C are set as the types of ART grades. Grades A to C have different LV.2 loop rates described below (see FIGS. 112 and 113 below). Then, the winning probability of the loop lottery of LV.2 is different due to the difference of the LV.2 loop rate (see FIG. 114 described later). If the winning probability of the loop lottery of LV.2 is high, the transition from LV.2 to LV.1 is avoided, and it becomes difficult to demote the level. That is, grades A to C have different probabilities of being demoted to LV.1 in LV.2.

Further, since the LV.2 loop rate is different, the winning probability of the opponent related to LV.2 is different. Since the opponents related to LV.2 are different, the values of EX points acquired during LV.2 are different (see FIGS. 86 to 97 described later). Then, the probability of raising and lowering the level differs depending on the value of the EX points acquired during LV.2. That is, if the value of the EX points acquired during LV.2 is large, the total of the EX points tends to reach the specified value (for example, 100 points), so that the probability of being promoted to LV.3 increases. Therefore, grades A to C differ in the probability that the level goes up and down from LV.2.

The ART grade lottery table defines the correspondence between the ART great type set for each mode type and set value and the lottery value.

In the ART grade lottery process using the ART grade lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is put into the ART grade lottery table. The lottery value of the specified ART Great type is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the type of ART great at that time has been won.

[Ex-point acquisition lottery table waiting for ART end]
Next, the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for the end of ART will be described. The ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery table is used when performing an ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery in the ART end waiting process described later.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 1) waiting for the end of ART. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 2) waiting for the end of ART. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 3) waiting for the end of ART.

The EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for the end of ART defines the correspondence between the EX points set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value, and the lottery value.

In the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery process using the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random number values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the EX points specified in the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for the end of ART. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the EX point at that time is won.

[Lottery table for earning EX points in LV.1]
Next, the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.1 will be described. The EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.1 is used when the EX point acquisition lottery in LV.1 is performed in the LV.1 intermediate processing described later.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 1) in LV.1. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 2) in LV.1. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 3) in LV.1.

The configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.1 shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 is the same as that of the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for ART completion shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is a configuration, the description of this table configuration will be omitted. Further, the method of the EX point acquisition lottery process in LV.1 using the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.1 also uses the EX point acquisition lottery process waiting for ART end using the above-mentioned EX point acquisition lottery table in ART end. Since it is the same as the method of (a method of sequentially subtracting lottery values to determine whether or not "digits" have occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

[Lottery table for earning EX points in LV.3]
Next, the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.3 will be described. The EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.3 is used when the EX point acquisition lottery in LV.3 is performed in the LV.3 intermediate processing described later.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 1) in LV.3. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 2) in LV.3. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 3) in LV.3.

The configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.3 shown in FIGS. 80 to 82 is the same as that of the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for ART completion shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is a configuration, the description of this table configuration will be omitted. Further, the method of the EX point acquisition lottery process in LV.3 using the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.3 also uses the EX point acquisition lottery process waiting for ART end using the above-mentioned EX point acquisition lottery table in ART end. Since it is the same as the method of (a method of sequentially subtracting lottery values to determine whether or not "digits" have occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

[Lottery table for earning EX points in LV.4]
Next, the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.4 will be described. The LV.4 medium EX point acquisition lottery table is used when the LV.4 medium EX point acquisition lottery is performed in the LV.4 medium processing described later.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 1) in LV.4. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 2) in LV.4. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 3) in LV.4.

The configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.4 shown in FIGS. 83 to 85 is the same as that of the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for ART completion shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is a configuration, the description of this table configuration will be omitted. Further, the method of the EX point acquisition lottery process in LV.4 using the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.4 also uses the EX point acquisition lottery process waiting for the end of ART using the above-mentioned EX point acquisition lottery table in ART end. Since it is the same as the method of (a method of sequentially subtracting lottery values to determine whether or not "digits" have occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

[Lottery table for earning EX points in LV.2]
Next, the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.2 will be described. The EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.2 is used when the EX point acquisition lottery in LV.2 is performed in the LV.2 intermediate processing described later.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy A) (No. 1) in LV.2. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy A) (No. 2) in LV.2. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy A) (No. 3) in LV.2.
The EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy A) in LV.2 shown in FIGS. 86 to 88 is referred to when the opponent is the enemy A in the battle production performed during LV.2.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy B) (No. 1) in LV.2. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy B) (No. 2) in LV.2. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy B) (No. 3) in LV.2.
The EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy B) in LV.2 shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 is referred to when the opponent is the enemy B in the battle effect performed during LV.2.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy C) (No. 1) in LV.2. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy C) (No. 2) in LV.2. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy C) (No. 3) in LV.2.
The EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy C) in LV.2 shown in FIGS. 92 to 94 is referred to when the opponent is the enemy C in the battle effect performed during LV.2.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy D) (No. 1) in LV.2. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy D) (No. 2) in LV.2. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy D) (No. 3) in LV.2.
The EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy D) in LV.2 shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 is referred to when the opponent is the enemy D in the battle production performed during LV.2.

The configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.2 shown in FIGS. 86 to 97 is the same as that of the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for ART completion shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since it is a configuration, the description of this table configuration will be omitted. Further, the method of the EX point acquisition lottery process in LV.2 using the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.2 also uses the EX point acquisition lottery process waiting for the end of ART using the above-mentioned EX point acquisition lottery table in ART end. Since it is the same as the method of (a method of sequentially subtracting lottery values to determine whether or not "digits" have occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, enemies A to D are set as the types of opponents related to LV.2. As shown in FIGS. 86 to 97, the probability of acquiring a large EX point during LV.2 differs due to the difference in the opponents (enemy A to D) related to LV.2. In the present embodiment, when the enemy D is selected, the probability of acquiring the EX points having a large value is the highest, followed by the enemy C, the enemy B, and the enemy A in that order. That is, when the enemy D is selected, the probability of being promoted to LV.3 is the highest, and when the enemy A is selected, the probability of being promoted to LV.3 is the lowest.

[Ex point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH]
Next, the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH will be described. The B_RUSH medium EX point acquisition lottery table is used when the B_RUSH medium EX point acquisition lottery is performed in the special preparation preparation process described later.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a configuration of an EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode A) (No. 1) in B_RUSH. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode A) (No. 2) in B_RUSH. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration of an EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode A) (No. 3) in B_RUSH.
The EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode A) in B_RUSH shown in FIGS. 98 to 100 is referred to when the type of BR mode is BR mode A in B_RUSH.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a configuration of an EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) (No. 1) in B_RUSH. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a configuration of an EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) (No. 2) in B_RUSH. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a configuration of an EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) (No. 3) in B_RUSH.
The EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) in B_RUSH shown in FIGS. 101 to 103 is referred to when the type of BR mode is BR mode B in B_RUSH.

In this embodiment, BR modes A to D are set as the types of BR modes. In BR modes A to D, the values of EX points acquired during B_RUSH, which will be described later, are different. Then, the winning probability of "B_RUSH" in "PTR" is different because the value of the EX points acquired during B_RUSH is different. That is, if the value of the EX points acquired during B_RUSH is large, the total of EX points tends to reach the specified value (for example, 100 points), so that the winning probability of "B_RUSH" in "PTR" is high.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to make the value of EX points acquired during B_RUSH different depending on the type of BR mode, a lottery table for acquiring EX points during B_RUSH corresponding to each of BR modes A to D is provided. ing. However, since the B_RUSH medium EX point acquisition lottery table for each BR mode has the same configuration, here, the B_RUSH medium EX point acquisition lottery table for BR mode A and BR mode B (see FIGS. 98 to 103). ) Is excerpted, and the figure and description showing the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH for BR modes C and D are omitted.

The configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH shown in FIGS. 98 to 103 is the same as that of the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for ART completion shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, the description of this table structure will be omitted. Further, the method of EX point acquisition lottery processing in B_RUSH using the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH is also the method of EX point acquisition lottery processing in ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery using the above-mentioned ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery table (lottery). Since it is the same as the method of sequentially subtracting the values and determining whether or not "digits" have occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

[Ex point acquisition lottery table in BB]
Next, the EX point acquisition lottery table in BB will be described. The EX point acquisition lottery table in BB is used when the EX point acquisition lottery in BB is performed in the BB time processing in ART described later.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 1) in BB. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 2) in BB.

The configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table in BB shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 is the same as that of the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for ART completion shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, the description of this table structure will be omitted. Further, the method of EX point acquisition lottery processing in BB using the EX point acquisition lottery table in BB is also the method of EX point acquisition lottery processing in ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery using the above-mentioned ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery table (lottery). Since it is the same as the method of sequentially subtracting the values and determining whether or not "digits" have occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

[Initial EX point acquisition lottery table at level transition]
Next, the initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition will be described. The initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition is used when the initial EX point acquisition lottery at the time of level transition is performed in the sub-game state transition processing described later.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a configuration of an initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition.
The initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition defines the correspondence between the EX points set for each level type and set value of the transfer destination and the lottery value. Hereinafter, "LV.5" indicates "PTR".

In the initial EX point acquisition lottery process at the time of level transition using the level transition initial EX point acquisition lottery table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random number values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the EX points specified in the initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the EX point at that time is won.

[PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified points]
Next, the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point will be described. The PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point is used when performing the PTR stock lottery after reaching the specified point in each level intermediate processing described later.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.1) after reaching the specified point. After reaching this specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.1) is referred to when it is in LV.1.
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.2) after reaching the specified point. After reaching this specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.2) is referred to when it is in LV.2.
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.3) after reaching the specified point. After reaching this specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.3) is referred to when it is in LV.3.
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.4) after reaching the specified point. After reaching this specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.4) is referred to when in LV.4.
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.5) after reaching the specified point. After reaching this specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.5) is referred to when it is in LV.5 (PTR).

After reaching the specified point, the PTR stock lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (missing) of the PTR stock set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value, and the lottery value.

In the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the specified point using the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point, first, the disturbance extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). After reaching the specified point, the numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the winning / non-winning (missing) lottery value of the PTR stock specified in the PTR stock lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning or non-winning (missing) of the PTR stock at that time is won.

[LV.2 loop rate lottery table]
Next, the LV.2 loop rate lottery table will be described. The LV.2 loop rate lottery table is used when the LV.2 loop rate lottery is performed in the LV.2 intermediate processing described later.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LV.2 loop rate lottery table (first time). This LV.2 loop rate lottery table (first time) is referred to when the number of continuations of LV.2 is the first time.
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LV.2 loop rate lottery table (other than the first time). This LV.2 loop rate lottery table (other than the first time) is referred to when the number of continuations of LV.2 is other than the first time.

The LV.2 loop rate lottery table defines the correspondence between the LV.2 loop rate type set for each ART grade type and set value and the lottery value.

In the LV.2 loop rate lottery process using the LV.2 loop rate lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. , LV.2 loop rate The lottery value of the type of LV.2 loop rate specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the type of LV.2 loop rate at that time is won.

[LV.2 loop lottery table]
Next, the LV.2 loop lottery table will be described. The LV.2 loop lottery table is used when the LV.2 loop lottery is performed in the LV.2 intermediate processing described later.
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LV.2 loop lottery table.

The LV.2 loop lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (missing) of the LV.2 loop and the lottery value set for each type and set value of the LV.2 loop rate.

In the LV.2 loop lottery process using the LV.2 loop lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as the LV. The lottery values of the winning and non-winning (missing) of the LV.2 loop specified in the .2 loop lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the LV.2 loop at that time has won.

[Opposite lottery table (LV.2)]
Next, the opponent lottery table (LV.2) will be described. The opponent lottery table (LV.2) is used when the opponent lottery is performed in the sub-game state transition processing described later.
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the configuration of an opponent lottery table (LV.2).

The opponent lottery table (LV.2) defines the correspondence between the opponent and the lottery value set for each type and set value of the LV.2 loop rate.

In the opponent lottery process using the opponent lottery table (LV.2), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used. The lottery value of the opponent specified in the opponent lottery table (LV.2) is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, if the subtraction result becomes negative (a "digit" occurs), it means that the opponent at that time has won.

[Opposite mode lottery table (LV.4)]
Next, the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) will be described. The opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) is used when the opponent mode lottery is performed in the sub-game state transition processing described later.
FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the configuration of an opponent mode lottery table (LV.4).

The opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) defines the correspondence between the opponent mode set for each type and set value of the previous opponent mode and the lottery value.

In the opponent mode lottery process using the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment). Are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the opponent mode defined in the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the opponent mode at that time is won.

[Opposite mode lottery table (LV.4) when changing settings]
Next, the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) at the time of setting change will be described. The opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) at the time of setting change is used when performing the opponent mode lottery at the time of setting change in the setting change processing described later.
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing the configuration of the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) when the setting is changed.

When the setting is changed, the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) defines the correspondence between the opponent mode set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the opponent mode lottery process at the time of setting change using the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) at the time of setting change, first, a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random number value extracted from is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the opponent mode defined in the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) at the time of setting change. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the opponent mode at that time is won.

[Specialized type lottery table added at the time of PTR winning]
Next, the special type lottery table added at the time of winning the PTR will be described. The special type lottery table added at the time of PTR winning is used when performing the special type lottery added at the time of PTR winning in the special preparation preparation process described later.
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the configuration of a special type lottery table added at the time of winning the PTR.

The PTR winning specialization type lottery table defines the correspondence between the additional specialization type set for each type and set value of the PTR winning opportunity and the lottery value.

In the PTR winning special type lottery process using the PTR winning special type lottery table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random number values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the additional specialization type specified in the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the additional specialization type at that time is won.

[PREMIUM middle addition lottery table]
Next, the additional lottery table in PREMIUM will be described. The PREMIUM middle addition lottery table is used when performing the PREMIUM middle addition lottery in the PREMIUM middle processing described later.
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a configuration of an additional lottery table in PREMIUM.

The additional lottery table in PREMIUM defines the correspondence between the winning or non-winning (missing) of the number of games set for each type and set value of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In the PREMIUM medium addition lottery process using the PREMIUM medium addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is added to the PREMIUM medium. The lottery value of the winning or non-winning (missing) number of games added to the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning or non-winning (missing) of the number of games added at that time is won.

[Premium number of additional games lottery table]
Next, a lottery table for the number of additional games in PREMIUM will be described. The PREMIUM middle-addition game number lottery table is used when performing the PREMIUM middle-addition lottery in the PREMIUM middle processing described later.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for the number of additional games in PREMIUM (No. 1). FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for the number of additional games in PREMIUM (No. 2).

The number of additional games in PREMIUM lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of additional games set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value and the lottery value.

In the PREMIUM medium addition game number lottery process using the PREMIUM medium addition game number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected. , PREMIUM Medium number of additional games The lottery value of the number of additional games specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

[A lottery table for the number of additional games during the PREMIUM combo]
Next, a lottery table for the number of additional games at the time of combo during PREMIUM will be described. The number of additional games during the PREMIUM combo table is used when the number of additional games during the PREMIUM combo is drawn in the PREMIUM processing described later.
FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for the number of additional games at the time of combo during PREMIUM.

The number of additional games during the PREMIUM combo lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of additional games set for each type of reel effect and the set value and the lottery value.

Number of additional games during PREMIUM during combo In the lottery process for the number of additional games during PREMIUM combo using the lottery table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the number of additional games specified in the number of additional games lottery table at the time of combo during PREMIUM. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

[FIGHTING middle loop rate lottery table]
Next, the loop rate lottery table in FIGHTING will be described. The FIGHTING middle loop rate lottery table is used when performing the FIGHTING middle loop rate lottery in the sub-game state transition processing described later.
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the configuration of a loop rate lottery table during FIGHTING.

The FIGHTING middle loop rate lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of FIGHT loop rate set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the FIGHTING medium loop rate lottery process using the FIGHTING medium loop rate lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used for FIGHTING. Medium loop rate The lottery value of the type of FIGHT loop rate specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the type of FIGHT loop rate at that time has been won.

[Continuous lottery table during FIGHTING]
Next, the continuous lottery table during FIGHTING will be described. The continuous lottery table during FIGHTING is used when the continuous lottery during FIGHTING is performed in the FIGHTING processing described later.
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the configuration of a continuous lottery table during FIGHTING.

The continuous lottery table during FIGHTING defines the correspondence between the winning type (winning / non-winning) of FIGHTING continuation set for each type and set value of the FIGHT loop rate and the lottery value.

In the continuous lottery process during FIGHTING using the continuous lottery table during FIGHTING, first, the random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) are continuously subjected to during FIGHTING. The lottery value of the continuation winning type (winning / non-winning) specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the continuation at that time has won.

[Additional lottery table in FIGHTING]
Next, the additional lottery table in FIGHTING will be described. The FIGHTING middle addition lottery table is used when performing the FIGHTING middle addition lottery in the FIGHTING middle processing described later.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the configuration of an additional lottery table (RT0) in FIGHTING. This FIGHTING middle addition lottery table (RT0) is referred to when it is in the RT0 gaming state.
FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the configuration of an additional lottery table (RT1) in FIGHTING. This FIGHTING middle addition lottery table (RT1) is referred to when it is in the RT1 gaming state.
FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a configuration of an additional lottery table (RT2) in FIGHTING. The additional lottery table (RT2) in FIGHTING is referred to when it is in the RT2 gaming state.
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the configuration of an additional lottery table (RT3) in FIGHTING. The additional lottery table (RT3) in FIGHTING is referred to when it is in the RT3 gaming state.
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing the configuration of a drawing table (RT4) added in FIGHTING. This FIGHTING middle addition lottery table (RT4) is referred to when it is in the RT4 gaming state.

In principle, "FIGHTING" in R_ART is executed during the RT3 gaming state. However, if the order of pressing the stop buttons related to the predetermined internal winning combination is incorrect, the RT gaming state may shift from the RT3 gaming state to another RT gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a lottery table is provided in FIGHTING for all RT gaming states (RT0 to RT4).

The FIGHTING middle addition lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning or non-winning (missing) of the number of games set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value, and the lottery value.

In the FIGHTING medium addition lottery process using the FIGHTING medium addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is added to the FIGHTING medium. The lottery value of the winning type (winning / non-winning) in addition to the number of games specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the number of games added at that time is won.

[Drawing table for the number of additional games in FIGHTING]
Next, the figure lottery table for the number of additional games in FIGHTING will be described. The FIGHTING middle addition game number lottery table is used when performing the FIGHTING middle addition game number lottery in the FIGHTING middle processing described later.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing the configuration of a drawing table for the number of additional games in FIGHTING (No. 1). FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the configuration of a drawing table for the number of additional games in FIGHTING (No. 2). FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a configuration of a drawing table for the number of additional games in FIGHTING (No. 3).

The FIG. TING number of additional games lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of additional games set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value and the lottery value.

In the FIGHTING middle addition game number lottery process using the FIGHTING middle addition game number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected. , FIGHTING Number of additional games in FIG. The lottery value of the number of additional games specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

[Additional lottery table in BURNING]
Next, the additional lottery table in BURNING will be described. The BURNING middle addition lottery table is used when the BURNING middle addition lottery is performed in the BURNING middle processing described later.
FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the configuration of an additional lottery table in BURNING.

The additional lottery table in BURNING defines the correspondence between the type of internal winning combination and the winning type (winning / non-winning) for adding the number of games set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the BURNING medium addition lottery process using the BURNING medium addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is added to the BURNING medium. The lottery value of the winning type (winning / non-winning) in addition to the number of games specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the number of games added at that time is won.

[BURNING middle addition game number lottery table]
Next, a lottery table for the number of additional games in BURNING will be described. The BURNING middle addition game number lottery table is used when the BURNING middle addition game number lottery is performed in the BURNING middle processing described later.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the configuration of the number of additional games lottery table (No. 1) in BURNING. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for the number of additional games in BURNING (No. 2). FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for the number of additional games in BURNING (No. 3).

The number of additional games in BURNING lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of additional games set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value and the lottery value.

In the BURNING middle addition game number lottery process using the BURNING middle addition game number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected. , BURNING Number of additional games in BURNING The lottery value of the number of additional games specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

[B_RUSH mode transition lottery table]
Next, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH mode transition lottery table is used when the B_RUSH mode transition lottery is performed in the sub-game state transition processing described later.
FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a configuration of a B_RUSH mode transition lottery table.

The B_RUSH mode transition lottery table defines the correspondence between the BR mode type set for each migration source type and set value and the lottery value.

In the B_RUSH mode transition lottery process using the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is transferred to the B_RUSH mode. The lottery value of the mode type specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the BR mode type at that time has been won.

[B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table]
Next, the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table is used when the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery is performed in the sub-game state transition processing described later.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table (No. 1). FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table (No. 2).

The B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table defines the correspondence between the precursor games set for each remaining game number and set value of the PTR and the lottery value.

In the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery process using the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as B_RUSH. Number of precursor games The lottery value of the number of precursor games specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of precursor games at that time has been won.

[PTR addition lottery table in B_RUSH]
Next, the PTR addition lottery table in B_RUSH will be described. The B_RUSH medium PTR addition lottery table is used when the B_RUSH medium PTR addition lottery is performed in the B_RUSH medium processing described later.
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for adding PTR in B_RUSH.

The PTR additional lottery table in B_RUSH defines the correspondence between the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the PTR added and the lottery value set for each type of internal winning combination and set value.

In the B_RUSH medium PTR addition lottery process using the B_RUSH medium PTR addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected from B_RUSH. The lottery value of the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the PTR added specified in the medium PTR addition lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the PTR addition at that time has been won.

[B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery table]
Next, a lottery table for the number of additional games in B_RUSH will be described. The B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery table is used when the B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery is performed in the B_RUSH middle processing described later.

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing the configuration of the number of additional games lottery table (1Gth) (No. 1) in B_RUSH. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the configuration of the number of additional games lottery table (1Gth) (No. 2) in B_RUSH. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the configuration of the number of additional games lottery table (1Gth) (No. 3) in B_RUSH. These B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery tables (1Gth) are referred to in the 1G (game) of B_RUSH.

As described above, in the "B_RUSH" of the present embodiment, three games are set as one set, and the number of additional games determined by lottery is notified in each game. Therefore, a lottery table for the number of additional games in B_RUSH corresponding to each of the 1G (game), 2G (game), and 3G (game) of "B_RUSH" is provided. However, since each B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery table has the same configuration, here, the B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery table for the 1Gth (see FIGS. 141 to 143) is extracted, and the 2Gth and 3Gth eyes are extracted. The figure and description which show the number of additional games lottery table in B_RUSH for use are omitted.

The number of additional games in B_RUSH lottery table (1st G) defines the correspondence between the number of additional games set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value and the lottery value.

In the B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery process using the B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery table (1Gth), first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the number of additional games specified in the number of additional games lottery table (1G) in B_RUSH. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

In addition, the configuration of the B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery table (2Gth) referred to in the 2G (game) of B_RUSH and the B_RUSH middle addition game number lottery table (3Gth) referred to in the 3G (game) of B_RUSH. Has the same configuration as the B_RUSH middle-added game number lottery table (1Gth) except for the setting mode of the lottery value, so the description and the figure of this table configuration will be omitted.

[B_RUSH loop rate lottery table]
Next, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH loop rate lottery table is used when the B_RUSH loop rate lottery is performed in the sub-game state transition processing described later.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (No. 1). FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (No. 2).

The B_RUSH loop rate lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of BR loop rate set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value and the lottery value.

In the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process using the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as the B_RUSH loop rate. The lottery value of the type of BR loop rate specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the type of BR loop rate at that time has been won.

[B_RUSH continuous lottery table]
Next, the B_RUSH continuous lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH continuous lottery table is used when the B_RUSH continuous lottery is performed in the B_RUSH intermediate treatment described later.
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing the configuration of a B_RUSH continuous lottery table.

The B_RUSH continuous lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning type (winning / non-winning) of B_RUSH continuation set for each type and set value of the BR loop rate and the lottery value.

In the B_RUSH continuous lottery process using the B_RUSH continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is put into the B_RUSH continuous lottery table. The lottery value of the specified B_RUSH continuation winning type (winning / non-winning) is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (winning / non-winning) of B_RUSH continuation at that time is won.

[RTG transition lottery table]
Next, the RTG transition lottery table will be described. The RTG transition lottery table is used when the RTG transition lottery is performed in the ART end waiting process described later.
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RTG transition lottery table.

The RTG transition lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the RTG set for each BB number and set value and the lottery value.

The "BB count" in the RTG transition lottery table means that when the sub-game state shifts from the "normal state" to "R_ART" after passing through "CZ" or "MICHI", by the time the "R_ART" ends. The number of "BBs" executed. Therefore, if the "BB" is not won in the "R_ART", the "BB number of times" is one.

In the RTG transition lottery process using the RTG transition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is put into the RTG transition lottery table. The lottery value of the specified RTG winning type (winning / non-winning) is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the RTG at that time has won.

[PTR stock loop rate lottery table during RTG]
Next, the PTR stock loop rate lottery table in RTG will be described. The PTR stock loop rate lottery table in RTG is used when the PTR stock loop rate lottery is performed in the RTG processing described later.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a configuration of a PTR stock loop rate lottery table (No. 1) in RTG. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a configuration of a PTR stock loop rate lottery table (No. 2) in RTG.

The PTR stock loop rate lottery table in RTG defines the correspondence between the type of PTR loop rate set for each type of internal winning combination and the set value and the lottery value.

In the PTR stock loop rate lottery process using the PTR stock loop rate lottery table in RTG, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected. , PTR stock loop rate in RTG The lottery value of the type of PTR loop rate specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the type of PTR loop rate at that time has been won.

[PTR stock lottery table during RTG]
Next, the PTR stock lottery table in RTG will be described. The PTR stock lottery table in RTG is used when the PTR stock lottery in RTG is performed in the RTG processing described later.
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing the configuration of a PTR stock lottery table in RTG.

The PTR stock lottery table in the RTG defines the correspondence between the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the PTR stock set for each type and set value of the PTR loop rate and the lottery value.

In the RTG medium PTR stock lottery process using the RTG medium PTR stock lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected from the RTG. The lottery value of the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the PTR stock specified in the medium PTR stock lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (winning / non-winning) of the PTR stock at that time has won.

[Specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB]
Next, the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB will be described. The specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB is used when performing the specific lip navigation conversion lottery in BB in the CZ processing and the BB processing during ART, which will be described later.
Hereinafter, "navigation" means navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination with a lamp, a liquid crystal display device 11, or the like.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the configuration of a specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (usually BB) in BB. The specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB (normal BB) is referred to in CZ (in BB) that has shifted from the normal state.
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a configuration of a specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (ARTBB) in BB. The specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (ARTBB) in the BB is referred to in the BB won during R_ART.

The specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB defines the correspondence between the winning type (yes / no) of the specific lip navigation conversion set for each SP point and the set value and the lottery value.

In the BB specific lip navigation conversion lottery process using the BB specific lip navigation conversion lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. , BB Specific Lip Navi conversion The lottery value of the winning type (yes / no) of the specific Lip Navi conversion specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (yes / no) of the specific Lipnavi conversion at that time is winning.

[Fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB]
Next, the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB will be described. The fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB is used when performing a fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery in BB in the CZ processing and the BB processing during ART, which will be described later.
FIG. 153 is a diagram showing the configuration of a fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB.

The fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB defines the correspondence between the winning type (yes / no) of the fake specific lip navigation conversion set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the BB medium fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process using the BB medium fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table, first, the random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment). Numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the winning type (yes / no) of the fake specific lipnavi conversion specified in the specific lipnavi conversion lottery table in BB. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (yes / no) of the fake specific lip navigation conversion at that time is won.

[Specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART]
Next, the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART will be described. The specific lipnavi conversion lottery table during ART is used when the specific lipnavi conversion lottery during ART is performed in the LV.1 intermediate processing, the LV.3 intermediate processing, and the LV.5 intermediate processing, which will be described later.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the configuration of a specific lipnavi conversion lottery table (LV.1) during ART. It is referred to when it is "LV.1" in the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.1) R_ART in this ART.
FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the configuration of a specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.3) during ART. It is referred to when it is "LV.3" in the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.3) R_ART in this ART.
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a configuration of a specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.5) during ART. It is referred to when it is "LV.5" in the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.5) R_ART in this ART.

The specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.1, 3, 5) during ART shows the correspondence between the winning type (yes / no) of the specific lip navigation conversion set for each SP point and set value and the lottery value. Prescribe.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing the configuration of a specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.2) during ART. It is referred to when it is "LV.2" in the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.2) R_ART in this ART.
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the configuration of a specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.4) during ART. It is referred to when it is "LV.4" in the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.4) R_ART in this ART.

The specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.1, 3, 5) during ART shows the correspondence between the winning type (yes / no) of the specific lip navigation conversion set for each number of games and set values and the lottery value. Prescribe.

In the ART specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process using the ART specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used. , During ART, the lottery value of the winning type (yes / no) of the specific lipnavi conversion specified in the lottery table for specific lipnavi conversion is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (yes / no) of the specific Lipnavi conversion at that time is winning.

[Fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART]
Next, the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART will be described. The fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART is used when performing a fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery during ART in the CZ processing and the BB processing during ART, which will be described later.
FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a configuration of a fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART.

The fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART defines the correspondence between the winning type (yes / no) of the specific lip navigation conversion set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the ART medium fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process using the ART medium fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table, first, the random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the winning type (yes / no) of the fake specific lip navigation conversion specified in the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the winning type (yes / no) of the specific Lipnavi conversion at that time is winning.

[Navigation type lottery table]
Next, the navigation type lottery table will be described. The navigation type lottery table is used when the navigation type lottery is performed in the main process by the sub-control circuit described later.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a configuration of a navigation type lottery table (No. 1). FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a configuration of a navigation type lottery table (No. 2). FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a configuration of a navigation type lottery table (No. 3). FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the configuration of a navigation type lottery table (No. 4). FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a configuration of a navigation type lottery table (No. 5).

The navigation type lottery table defines the correspondence between the navigation type and the lottery value set for each lottery condition.

In the navigation type lottery process using the navigation type lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is extracted into a fake specific lip navigation during ART. The lottery value of the navigation type specified in the conversion lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the navigation type at that time is won.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 to 187, the contents of various processes executed by the main control unit 40 using the program will be described.

[Main operation processing of pachislot machines controlled by the main control unit]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main control unit 40 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control unit 40 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed. Further, when it is determined that the setting change has been appropriately performed, the main control unit 40 transmits a setting change command to the sub control circuit 42. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying settings (settings 1 to 6) and the like.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main control unit 40 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S is checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 166, which will be described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a random number acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main control unit 40 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. ..

Next, the main control unit 40 performs an effect random number acquisition process (S5). In this process, the main control unit 40 extracts an effect random value (0 to 65535) used in the game lock lottery, and stores the extracted random value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. To do. In this embodiment, it is possible to extract a plurality of types of effect random values.

Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the random number value storage area, the main control unit 40 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value for the internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 167 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). In this process, the type of "game lock" is determined by lottery based on the effect random value extracted in S5. The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 169 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 42. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying an internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a lock process at the start of the game (S10). In this process, the lock (reel effect) and the lock timer corresponding to the type (lock number, continuous lock number) of the "game lock" determined in the process of S7 are mainly set. Then, the main control unit 40 waits until the lock timer becomes 0.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs weight processing (S11). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main control unit 40 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main control unit 40 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 187, which will be described later), which is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main control unit 40 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 175 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main control unit 40 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 47) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 43). Further, in this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 11). To collate. Then, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a medal payout process (S16). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S15, and the medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 11), the number of medals inserted is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum number of medals to be paid out is three. The number of medals (upper limit of payout) is nine.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main control unit 40 manages the RT gaming state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 184 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a payout end command transmission process (S18). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 42.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this process, the main control unit 40 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game, and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is ended. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 185 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a bonus operation check process (S20). In this process, the main control unit 40 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 186 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main control unit 40 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

As described above, the start command transmission process (S9) of the main flow of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the start command, predetermined commands (for example, a reel stop command, a display command, a payout end command, a bonus start command, a bonus end command, etc., which will be described later) are subordinate to various triggers of the game operation. It is transmitted to the control circuit 42, and the transmission process of these command data is also executed by the main control circuit 41.

Further, as described above, in the main flow process of the present embodiment, the game lock control process is performed (S10), and this process is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (lock control means) for controlling the lock function.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not there is an automatic closing request (S31). The presence / absence of the automatic closing request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main control unit 40 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request. ..

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

When the main control unit 40 determines in S31 that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs an automatic closing process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared. After that, the main control unit 40 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, in S31, when the main control unit 40 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main control unit 40 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 14 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 33.

Next, the main control unit 40 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, the main control unit 40 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets to "3".

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When the main control unit 40 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is not permitted (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs the medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and if a medal has been inserted, adds "1" to the inserted number counter.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a medal insertion command transmission process (S37). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 42. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S38). In S38, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, in S38, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S39 described later. In the present embodiment, the number of cards that can be started is "3" regardless of the game state (see FIG. 14).

After the processing of S32, if S35 is a NO determination or S38 is a YES determination, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the start switch is ON (S39). In S39, when the main control unit 40 determines that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

On the other hand, in S39, when the main control unit 40 determines that the start switch is ON (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 24. When this process is completed, the main control unit 40 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state (S51). That is, the main control unit 40 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44), and the type and lottery of the internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 14). Determine the number of times. The number of lottery indicates the number of times for each winning number specified by the internal lottery table to subtract the lottery value and determine whether or not a digit has occurred.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a lottery value change process (S52). In this process, the lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 are changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 168 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 acquires a random number value for internal lottery stored in the random number value storage area (S53). Then, the main control unit 40 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value for the internal lottery (S54).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the calculation result in S54 is less than "0" (negative value) (S55). In S55, when the main control unit 40 determines that the calculation result is less than "0" (when the determination in S55 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S59 described later.

On the other hand, in S55, when the main control unit 40 determines that the calculation result is not less than "0" (when the determination in S55 is NO), the main control unit 40 updates the random number value and the winning number (S56). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is used as a random value, and the winning number is added by "1".

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S57). When it is determined in S57 that the main control unit 40 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S57 is NO), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S54 and repeats the processes after S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S57 that the main control unit 40 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S57 is YES), the main control unit 40 sets "0" as the winning number (S58).

After the processing of S58 or when the determination of YES in S55, the main control unit 40 performs the winning number correction processing (S59). In this process, the main control unit 40 sets the value of the winning number as a data pointer when the gaming state is the non-MB (non-CB) gaming state, and when the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state. Is set as a data pointer by adding "51" to the value of the winning number. The details of the winning number correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 168 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 26 and 27) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the data pointer (S60).

Next, the main control unit 40 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S61). Next, the main control unit 40 updates the carry-over combination storage area based on the data of bits 4 to 7 (“C_MB1” to “C_MB4”) of the internal winning combination storage area 2 (S62).

Next, the main control unit 40 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S63). Then, after the processing of S63, the main control unit 40 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

As described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for executing the determination process of the internal winning combination (internal winning combination determining means).

[Lottery price change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the lottery value changing process performed in S52 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44) and determines whether or not the RT0 game state flag is on (S71). Specifically, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not "1" is set in bit 0 in the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 44). Then, in S71, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RT0 game state flag is ON (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main control unit 40 ends the lottery value change process and performs the process by internal lottery. Move to S53 of the process (see FIG. 167).

On the other hand, in S71, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RT0 gaming state flag is not on (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main control unit 40 corresponds to the RT gaming state in the ON state. With reference to the internal lottery table for general games, the lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 of the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 15) are changed (S72). After that, the main control unit 40 ends the lottery value changing process, and shifts the process to S53 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S81). In S81, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S81 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S85.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RT game state is the RT4 game state (when the determination in S81 is YES), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the previous game is "red 7". (S82). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the code name "RP19" (G_special lip 1) or the code name "RP20" (G_special lip 2) is displayed in the previous game.

In S82, when the main control unit 40 determines that the previous game is not aligned with "Red 7" (when the determination in S82 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S85. On the other hand, in S82, when the main control unit 40 determines that the previous games are all "red 7" (when the determination in S82 is YES), the main control unit 40 is in the RT4 game state combo generation lottery table ( Refer to FIG. 40), and perform a combo generation lottery based on the random value for production (S83). In this combo generation lottery, it is determined whether or not to generate (success) the above-mentioned "combo". Specifically, when it is decided not to generate the "combo" when the lock number "11" or "12" is won in the combo generation lottery, and when the lock number "13" or "14" is won, It is decided to generate (success) a "combo". After the processing of S83, the main control unit 40 performs the processing of S90.

When the determination in S81 or S82 is NO, the main control unit 40 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39) and performs the game lock lottery based on the effect random value (S84). In this game lock lottery, one of the game lock numbers "0" to "7" is determined.

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the result of the game lock lottery this time is the lock numbers "1", "2", "6", or "7" (S85). When the main control unit 40 determines in S85 that the lock number is "1", "2", "6" or "7" (when the determination in S85 is YES), the main control unit 40 processes the S90. I do.

On the other hand, in S85, when the main control unit 40 determines that the result of the game lock lottery this time is not the lock numbers "1", "2", "6" or "7" (when S85 is NO determination). , The main control unit 40 determines whether or not the result of the game lock lottery this time is the lock number “3” or “4” (S86).

In S86, when the main control unit 40 determines that the result of the game lock lottery this time is the lock number "3" or "4" (when the determination in S86 is YES), the main control unit 40 is the game lock counter. Is set to "1" (S87).

The game lock counter according to the present embodiment is a counter that manages the number of games until the game lock is executed. Therefore, if the lock number "3" or "4" is won, the game lock is executed one game later (next game). After the processing of S87, the main control unit 40 ends the game lock lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

In S86, when the main control unit 40 determines that the result of the game lock lottery this time is not the lock number "3" or "4" (when the determination in S86 is NO), the main control unit 40 is the game lock counter. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than "0" (S88). When it is determined in S88 that the value of the game lock counter is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S88 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the game lock lottery process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 165). ) Move to S8.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S88 that the value of the game lock counter is larger than "0" (when the determination in S88 is YES), the main control unit 40 subtracts the value of the game lock counter by "1" (S89).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the value of the game lock counter is "0" (S90). In S90, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the game lock counter is not "0" (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the game lock lottery process and performs the process in the main flow. Move to S8 (see FIG. 165).

On the other hand, in S90, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the game lock counter is "0" (when the determination in S90 is YES), after the processing in S83, or when the determination in S85 is YES, the main control The unit 40 sets a value corresponding to the lock number in the lock timer (S91). After the processing of S91, the main control unit 40 ends the game lock lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

The lock number won by the game lock lottery in S84 is stored in the game lock flag storage area. Therefore, even if the result of the game lock lottery this time is "missing", if the lock number is stored in the game lock flag storage area, the value corresponding to the lock number is set in the lock timer.

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described with reference to FIG. 170.

First, the main control unit 40 refers to the rotation cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 28), and based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. 165, the rotation cylinder 40 Acquire the stop number (S101).

Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30), and acquires various information corresponding to the reel stop number based on the acquired reel stop number (S102). Specifically, the main control unit 40 includes a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number. The initial data for changing the table at the time of forward pressing and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing are acquired.

Next, the main control unit 40 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47) (S103).

Next, the main control unit 40 stores “3” in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S104). After that, the main control unit 40 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 165). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 performs a game lock command transmission process (S111). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits a game lock command to the sub control circuit 42. The game lock command is configured to include a lock number and the like. Next, the main control unit 40 sets the reel effect pattern according to the lock number (S112).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the combo is successful (S113). This combo success means that the lock number "13" or "14" was won in the process of S183 in FIG. 169. When the main control unit 40 determines in S113 that the combo is not successful (when the determination in S112 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S123.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S113 that the combo is successful (when the determination in S113 is YES), the main control unit 40 refers to the combo continuation rate lottery table (see FIG. 41) for production. The combo continuation rate lottery is performed based on the random number value (S114). In this combo continuation rate lottery, the PRE loop rate is determined.

Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the combo continuous lottery table (see FIG. 42) and performs the combo continuous lottery based on the random value for effect (S115). In this combo continuation lottery, it is decided whether or not to continue the above-mentioned "combo". Specifically, when the lock number "0" is won in the combo continuation lottery, it is decided not to continue the "combo", and when any one of the lock numbers "13" to "15" is won, It is decided to continue the "combo".

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the reel effect is completed (S116). When the main control unit 40 determines in S116 that the reel effect has not been completed (when the determination in S116 is NO), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S116 and waits until the reel effect is completed.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S116 that the reel effect has been completed (when the determination in S116 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs a game lock command transmission process (S117). Next, the main control unit 40 sets the reel effect pattern according to the lock number determined in S115 (S118).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated (S119). When the main control unit 40 determines in S119 that the start lever 16 has not been operated (when the determination in S119 is NO), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S119 until the start lever 16 is operated. stand by.

On the other hand, in S119, when the main control unit 40 determines that the start lever 16 has been operated (when the determination in S119 is YES), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the lottery result of S115 is a combo continuation. (S120). This combo continuation means that the lock numbers "13" to "15" are won in the process of S115. In S120, when the main control unit 40 determines that the combo is continued (when the determination in S120 is YES), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S115.

In S120, when the main control unit 40 determines that the combo is not continued (when the determination in S120 is NO), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the reel effect is completed (S121). When the main control unit 40 determines in S121 that the reel effect has not been completed (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S121 and waits until the reel effect is completed.

On the other hand, in S121, when the main control unit 40 determines that the reel effect has been completed (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main control unit 40 sets the value of the lock timer to 0 (S122).

When the determination in S113 is NO, or after the processing in S122, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the lock timer is 0 (S123). When the main control unit 40 determines in S123 that the lock timer is not 0 (when the determination in S123 is NO), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S123 and waits until the lock timer becomes 0.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S123 that the lock timer is 0 (when the determination in S123 is YES), the main control unit 40 has the lock number “5” among the stored game lock flags. ~ Clear other than "7" (S124). After that, the main control unit 40 ends the lock process at the start of the game, and shifts the process to S11 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 stores the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 53 (S131). Next, the main control unit 40 performs a search target reel determination process (S132). In this process, the main control unit 40 selects a predetermined reel from, for example, a rotating reel, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

For example, in the process of S132, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S141 described later are performed on the left reel 3L, and when returning to S132 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S141 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S132 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S133). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 173, which will be described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 sets "0" as the symbol position data and sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (S134). Then, the main control unit 40 performs a symbol code storage process (S135). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 174 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 43) based on the symbol code acquired in S135 and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47) (S136). At this point, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable winning combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 11) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S137). In this process, the main control unit 40 has a combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 43) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. The attraction priority data is acquired by referring to the attraction priority table (see FIG. 36).

Next, the main control unit 40 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 48) (S138). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other. Next, the main control unit 40 adds "1" to the symbol position data and subtracts "1" from the symbol check count (S139).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S140). When the main control unit 40 determines in S140 that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S140 is NO), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S135 and repeats the processes after S135.

On the other hand, in S140, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S140 is YES), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches. (S141).

When it is determined in S141 that the main control unit 40 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S132 and repeats the processes after S132. On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the main control unit 40 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main control unit 40 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 165). (See) to S14.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S133 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 172) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S8). (S151). When the main control unit 40 determines in S151 that the attraction priority table number is set (when the determination in S151 is YES), the main control unit 40 ends the attraction priority table selection process and performs the process. It is moved to S134 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 172).

On the other hand, in S151, when the main control unit 40 determines that the attraction priority table number is not set (when the determination in S151 is NO), the main control unit 40 is in the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 46) and Refer to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 45) and set the corresponding pull-in priority table number (S152). Then, after the processing of S152, the main control unit 40 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S134 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 172).

In S132, first, the main control unit 40 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the attraction priority table selection table corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data, and acquires the attraction priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main control unit 40 sets the acquired attraction priority table number.

[Design code storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the symbol code storage process performed in S135 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 172) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 sets the effective line data (S161). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main control unit 40 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S162). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main control unit 40 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S163). Then, the main control unit 40 stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S136 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 172).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described with reference to FIG. 175.

First, the main control unit 40 performs a stop button detection process (S171). In this process, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed, and also determines whether or not the left stop button has been pressed in the first stop operation. The details of the stop button detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 176, which will be described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 46) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 45) based on the detection result of the stop button detection process in S171 (determination result of the effectively pressed stop button). (See) is updated (S172). Next, the main control unit 40 subtracts "1" from the stop button non-operation counter (S173).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S174). Then, the main control unit 40 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S175).

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S176). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 177 described later. Next, the main control unit 40 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42 (S177). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The ON edge / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42.

Next, the main control unit 40 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S176, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 53 (S178). In this process, the main control unit 40 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the scheduled stop position.

Next, the main control unit 40 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S178 as the search symbol position (S179). Next, the main control unit 40 performs the symbol code storage process described with reference to FIG. 174 (S180). After that, the main control unit 40 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47) using the symbol code acquired in S180 (S181).

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a control change process (S182). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 182 described later. Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S183). In S183, when the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (when the determination in S183 is NO), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S183, and the pressed stop button is released. Wait until you are released.

On the other hand, in S183, when the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (when the determination in S183 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S184). In this process, the main control unit 40 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S177. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S184 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S177.

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S185). In S185, when the main control unit 40 determines that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S185 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 172. Do (S186). After that, the main control unit 40 returns the process to S171 and repeats the processes after S171.

On the other hand, in S185, when the main control unit 40 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S185 is YES), the main control unit 40 ends the reel stop control process and mainly performs the process. Transfer to S15 of the flow (see FIG. 165).

As described above, the reel stop control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (display of fluctuation of the symbol).

[Stop button detection process]
Next, the stop button detection process performed in S171 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. 176.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not there is a pressed stop button (S191). In S191, when the main control unit 40 determines that there is no pressed stop button (when the determination in S191 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection process and performs the process in the reel stop control process (reel stop control process). (See FIG. 175), and move to S172.

On the other hand, in S191, when the main control unit 40 determines that there is a pressed stop button (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main control unit 40 determines whether the stop operation of the stop button is the first stop operation. Whether or not it is determined (S192). In S192, when the main control unit 40 determines that the stop operation of the stop button is not the first stop operation (when the determination in S192 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S197 described later.

On the other hand, in S192, when the main control unit 40 determines that the stop operation of the stop button is the first stop operation (when the determination in S192 is YES), the lock numbers of the main control unit 40 are "5" to "5" to ". It is determined whether or not it is any of 7 ”(S193).

In S193, when the main control unit 40 determines that the lock number is any of "5" to "7" (when the determination in S193 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs the first stop lock process. Do (S194). In this first stop lock process, a value corresponding to the lock number is set in the lock timer, and a reel effect pattern corresponding to the lock number is set. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main control unit 40 clears the lock numbers "5" to "7" of the game lock flag, and ends the first stop lock process.

When the determination in S193 is NO, or after the processing in S194, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is pressed (S195). In this process, when there is only one stop button pressed in the first stop operation, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is the left stop button 17L. Further, in this process, when there are a plurality of stop buttons pressed in the first stop operation, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is included in the plurality of pressed stop buttons. To determine.

In S195, when the main control unit 40 determines that the left stop button 17L is not pressed (when the determination in S195 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S197 described later. On the other hand, in S195, when the main control unit 40 determines that the left stop button 17L has been pressed (when the determination in S195 is YES), the main control unit 40 sets the left stop button 17L as a effectively pressed stop button. (S196). Then, after the processing of S196, the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection processing, and shifts the processing to S172 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

When S192 or S195 determines NO, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not a plurality of stop buttons have been pressed (S197). In S197, when the main control unit 40 determines that a plurality of stop buttons have been pressed (when the determination in S197 is YES), the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection process and performs the process in the reel stop control process (reel stop control process). (See FIG. 175), and move to S172. That is, when a plurality of stop buttons are pressed in a stop operation other than the first stop operation, or when the stop button pressed in the first stop operation does not include the left stop button, this stop button is used. The pressing operation is treated as an invalid operation.

On the other hand, in S197, when the main control unit 40 determines that a plurality of stop buttons have not been pressed (when the determination in S197 is NO), the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop buttons are rotating reels. It is determined whether or not the button is a stop button (S198). In S198, when the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop button is not the stop button of the rotating reel (when the determination in S198 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection process. The process is transferred to S172 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 175). That is, when the pressed stop button is the stop button corresponding to the stopped reel, the pressing operation of the stop button is treated as an invalid operation.

On the other hand, in S198, when the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop button is the stop button of the rotating reel (when the determination in S198 is YES), the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop button is the pressed stop button. Is set as a stop button that is effectively pressed (S199). Then, after the processing of S199, the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection processing and shifts the processing to S172 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

As described above, in S191 to S196 of the stop button detection process of the present embodiment, when a plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are simultaneously pressed in the first reel stop operation, the left stop button 17L is pressed. Is enabled and the pressing of other stop buttons is disabled. Then, this process is executed by the main control unit 40. That is, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are simultaneously pressed in the first stop operation of the reel, the main control unit 40 effectively presses the left stop button 17L. Also serves as a means to determine.

[Sliding piece number determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the slip piece number determination process performed in S176 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 175) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 selects the line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S201). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main control unit 40 sets "1" as line mask data in the bit 7 corresponding to the "left reel A line" of the stop data. Select "10000000". Further, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main control unit 40 sets "1" as line mask data in the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data, "00010000". Select. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main control unit 40 sets “100000010” as line mask data in bit 1 corresponding to the “right reel A line” of the stop data. Select.

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S202). When the main control unit 40 determines in S202 that it is not the first stop (when the determination in S202 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the second and third stop processes (S203). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 178, which will be described later. After that, the main control unit 40 performs the process of S211 described later.

On the other hand, in S202, when the main control unit 40 determines that the first stop is performed (when the determination in S202 is YES), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the operation stop button is the left stop button. (S204).

In S204, when the main control unit 40 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S204 is YES), the main control unit 40 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (when the operation stop button is determined to be YES). S205). In this process, the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30). Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward push corresponding to the table selection data at the time of forward push, and acquires the slip piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S206). .. After that, the main control unit 40 performs the process of S211 described later.

On the other hand, in S204, when the main control unit 40 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when the determination in S204 is NO), the main control unit 40 acquires the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing, and the irregularity thereof. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the push table selection data is set (S207). In this process, the irregular pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30).

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a line change bit check process (S208). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 179, which will be described later. Next, the main control unit 40 performs a line mask data change process (S209). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 180 described later. After that, the main control unit 40 refers to the set irregular push stop table and acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S210).

After the processing of S203, S206 or S210, the main control unit 40 performs the priority pull-in control processing (S211). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 181 described later. After that, the main control unit 40 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and shifts the process to S177 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 175).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the second and third stop processes performed in S203 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 177) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S221). When the main control unit 40 determines in S221 that it is not during the second stop operation (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S224 described later.

On the other hand, in S221, when the main control unit 40 determines that the second stop operation is in progress (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main control unit 40 pushes the stop buttons forward (the first stop is It is determined whether or not the left reel is 3L) (S222). When the main control unit 40 determines in S222 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S222 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S224 described later.

On the other hand, in S202, when the main control unit 40 determines that the push is forward (when the determination in S222 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs the line change bit check process (S223). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 179, which will be described later.

After the processing of S223, or when S221 or S222 is NO determination, the main control unit 40 performs the line mask data change processing (S224). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 180 described later. Next, the main control unit 40 performs a sliding piece number search process (S225). In this process, the number of slip pieces is determined based on the stop start position with reference to the stop tables (FIGS. 31, 33 and 34).

For example, when the line mask data is "00010000" corresponding to the "middle reel A line", the main control unit 40 refers to the column of the "middle reel A line" of the bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search for whether or not the corresponding data is "1" is sequentially performed. Next, the main control unit 40 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is "1" to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the slip piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S225, the main control unit 40 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S211 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the line change bit performed in S208 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 177) and S223 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 178). The check process will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the change status is "1" or "2" (S231). In S231, when the main control unit 40 determines that the change status is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S231 is YES), the main control unit 40 sets the corresponding line status (S232). .. In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B-line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S232, the main control unit 40 finishes the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S209 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. FIG. 178) Move to the process of S224.

On the other hand, in S231, when the main control unit 40 determines that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S231 is NO), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S233). In this process, the main control unit 40 refers to the column corresponding to the "middle reel line change bit" or "right reel line change bit" in the stop table (see FIGS. 33 and 34), and corresponds to the stop start position. It is determined whether or not the data is "1". Then, when the main control unit 40 determines in S233 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when the determination in S233 is NO), the main control unit 40 , The line change bit check process is completed, and the process is transferred to S209 of the slide piece number determination process (see FIG. 177) or S224 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 178).

On the other hand, in S233, when the main control unit 40 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is "1", that is, the line change bit is on (when the determination in S233 is YES), the main control unit 40 sets the B line status (S234). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S234, the main control unit 40 finishes the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S209 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. FIG. 178) Move to the process of S224.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the line mask data performed in S209 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 177) and S224 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 178). The change process will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S241). The C-line status is set when the forward push is performed in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 183) described later.

In S241, when the main control unit 40 determines that the C line status is set (when the determination in S241 is YES), the main control unit 40 has a middle stop button as the operation stop button at the time of the second stop. Whether or not it is determined (S242).

In S242, when the main control unit 40 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (when the determination in S242 is YES), the main control unit 40 shifts the line mask data to the right twice. Rotate (S243). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the right stop button. Therefore, the process of S243 changes the line mask data from "00000010" to "10000000". As a result, the column of bits 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables (see FIG. 33) at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S243, the main control unit 40 finishes the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S210 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. FIG. 178) Move to the process of S225.

On the other hand, in S242, when the main control unit 40 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S242 is NO), the main control unit 40 shifts the line mask data to the left 2 Rotate the times (S244). If it is a forward push and the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00010000" to "01000000" by the processing of S244. As a result, the row of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S244, the main control unit 40 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S210 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. FIG. 178) Move to the process of S225.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S241 again, when the main control unit 40 determines in S241 that the C line status is not set (when the determination in S241 is NO), the main control unit 40 is B. It is determined whether or not the line status is set (S245). When the main control unit 40 determines in S245 that the B line status is not set (when the determination in S245 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the line mask data change process and slips the process. The process proceeds to S210 of the determination process (see FIG. 177) or S225 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 178).

On the other hand, in S245, when the main control unit 40 determines that the B line status is set (when the determination in S245 is YES), the main control unit 40 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S246). ). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to "B line data" in the stop table (see FIGS. 33 and 34) is referenced. Then, after the processing of S246, the main control unit 40 finishes the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S210 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. FIG. 178) Move to the process of S225.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the priority pull-in control process performed in S211 in the flowchart (see FIG. 177) of the slide piece number determination process will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 sets a search order table (see FIG. 37) according to the game state (S251). Next, the main control unit 40 sets initial values in the search order counter and the number of checks (S252). Specifically, the main control unit 40 sets "1" as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main control unit 40 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main control unit 40 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the slip piece number determination data (S253).

Next, the main control unit 40 acquires the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S254). Next, the main control unit 40 adds the acquired number of slip pieces to the expected address at the start of stopping, and acquires the attraction priority data (S255).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the attraction priority data acquired in S255 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S256). When the main control unit 40 determines in S256 that the attraction priority data acquired in S255 does not exceed the previously acquired attraction priority data (when the determination in S256 is NO), the main control unit 40 will be described later. The process of S258 is performed.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S256 that the attraction priority data acquired in S255 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S256 is YES), the main control unit 40 determines that the attraction priority data is S254. The number of sliding pieces acquired in is evacuated (S257).

After the processing of S257 or when the determination in S256 is NO, the main control unit 40 subtracts "1" from the number of checks and adds "1" to the search order counter (S258).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S259). When the main control unit 40 determines in S259 that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S254 and repeats the processes after S254.

On the other hand, in S259, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main control unit 40 restores the number of retracted sliding pieces (S260). ). Then, after the processing of S260, the main control unit 40 ends the priority pull-in control processing and also ends the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 182, the control change process performed in S182 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 175) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S271). When the main control unit 40 determines in S271 that it is after the third stop (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main control unit 40 ends the control change process and performs the process as a reel stop control process (FIG. 175). (See) to S183.

On the other hand, in S271, when the main control unit 40 determines that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S272). .. When the main control unit 40 determines in S272 that it is after the second stop (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs the control process after the second stop (S273). The details of the control process after the second stop will be described later with reference to FIG. 183 described later. Then, after the processing of S273, the main control unit 40 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S183 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

On the other hand, in S272, when the main control unit 40 determines that it is not after the second stop (when the determination in S272 is NO), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the push is forward (S274). When the main control unit 40 determines in S274 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S274 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the control change process and performs the process in the reel stop control process (see FIG. 175). Move to S183.

On the other hand, in S274, when the main control unit 40 determines that the forward push is performed (when the determination in S274 is YES), the main control unit 40 changes the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data. (See FIG. 32) is acquired, and the number of searches is set (S275).

Next, the main control unit 40 acquires the planned stop position (S276). Then, the main control unit 40 updates the change target position according to the acquired scheduled stop position (S277).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S277 coincides with the scheduled stop position (S278). In S278, when the main control unit 40 determines that the updated position to be changed does not match the planned stop position (when the determination in S278 is NO), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the number of searches is "0". (S279).

When the main control unit 40 determines in S279 that the number of searches is not "0" (when the determination in S279 is NO), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S277 and repeats the processes after S277. On the other hand, in S279, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of searches is "0" (when the determination in S279 is YES), the main control unit 40 forwardly pushes the value of the table change initial data at the time of forward pressing. The time is acquired as the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S280).

Next, the main control unit 40 sets “0” in the C line check data (S281). Then, after the processing of S281, the main control unit 40 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S183 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

Further, in S278, when the main control unit 40 determines that the updated position to be changed matches the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S278 is YES), the main control unit 40 moves in the order according to the value of the line change status. When pressed, the second and third stop table numbers and C line check data are acquired (S282).

Next, the main control unit 40 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers at the time of forward pressing (S283). Then, after the processing of S283, the main control unit 40 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S183 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

[Control change processing after the second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the second post-stop control change process performed in S273 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 182) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the push is forward (S291). When the main control unit 40 determines in S291 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S291 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the control change process after the second stop and controls change process (see FIG. 182). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the main control unit 40 is pushing forward (when the determination in S291 is YES), the main control unit 40 determines whether the C line check data is on (when the change status is "3"). Whether or not there is) is determined (S292). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S282 of the control change process (see FIG. 182). Then, in S292, when the main control unit 40 determines that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in S292 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the control change process after the second stop and controls. The change process (see FIG. 182) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S292, when the main control unit 40 determines that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S292 is YES), the main control unit 40 has a line corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether or not the change bit is on (S293). When the main control unit 40 determines in S293 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when the determination in S293 is NO), the main control unit 40 controls after the second stop. Along with ending the change process, the control change process (see FIG. 182) also ends.

On the other hand, in S293, when the main control unit 40 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when the determination in S293 is YES), the main control unit 40 is stored. When the forward press is performed, "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing, and the corresponding stop table is set (S294). Next, the main control unit 40 sets the C line status (S295). Then, after the processing of S295, the main control unit 40 ends the control change processing after the second stop, and also ends the control change processing (see FIG. 182).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described with reference to FIG. 184.

First, the main control unit 40 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 13) and checks the transition conditions of the RT gaming state that can be established in the RT gaming state of the transition source (current) (S301).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (S302). When the main control unit 40 determines in S302 that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (when the determination in S302 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S304 described later.

On the other hand, in S302, when the main control unit 40 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S302 is YES), the main control unit 40 displays the RT transition table (see FIG. 13). Refer to it, and based on the transition condition, set the RT game status flag of the transition destination to a predetermined bit of the game status flag storage area (see FIG. 44) to update the game status flag storage area (S303).

After the processing of S303, or when the determination of S302 is NO, the main control unit 40 performs the display command transmission processing (S304). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 42. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S304, the main control unit 40 ends the RT control processing and shifts the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

As described above, the RT control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (replay time state control means) for controlling the transition of the RT gaming state.

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described with reference to FIG. 185.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S311). When the main control unit 40 determines in S311 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S311 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S314 described later.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S311 that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S311 is YES), the main control unit 40 gives the main control unit 40 a bonus. Processing at the end is performed (S312). In this process, the main control unit 40 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "BB". If the player is in the RB game state, the RB game state flag is turned off and the winning counter and the game counter are cleared. If the RB is being carried over, the RB carry-over flag stored in the carry-over combination storage area (not shown) is turned off. If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeds 44 during the BB game state.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S313). In this process, the main control unit 40 transmits a bonus end command to the sub control circuit 42. The bonus end command includes information such as the type of the completed bonus. After the processing of S313, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

On the other hand, in S311 when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S311 is NO), the main control unit 40 has the RB game state flag turned on. Whether or not it is determined (S314).

In S314, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RB game state flag is not on (when the determination in S314 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the bonus end check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 165). See), move to S20.

On the other hand, in S314, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RB game state flag is ON (when the determination in S314 is YES), the main control unit 40 subtracts 1 from the winning count counter and the playable count counter. (S315).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the playable number counter is “0” (S316). In S316, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is not "0" (when the determination in S316 is NO), the main control unit 40 checks the end of the bonus. The process is completed, and the process is transferred to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

On the other hand, in S316, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the playable number counter is "0" (when the determination in S316 is YES), the main control unit 40 determines. Processing at the end of RB is performed (S317). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game status flag (RB game status flag) corresponding to "RB", clearing the winning counter and the game counter is performed. Then, after the processing of S316, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus end check processing and shifts the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described with reference to FIG. 186.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the display combination is "BB" (S321). In S321, when the main control unit 40 determines that the display combination is not "BB" (when the determination in S321 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S326 described later.

On the other hand, in S321, when the main control unit 40 determines that the display combination is "BB" (when the determination in S321 is YES), the main control unit 40 refers to the bonus operating table and responds to the display combination. BB operation time processing is performed (S322). In this process, the BB game state flag corresponding to the game state flag storage area is stored, and "44" is stored in the bonus end number counter.

Next, the main control unit 40 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S323). Then, the main control unit 40 turns on the RT0 game state flag and turns off the RT1 game state flag (S324).

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S325). In this process, the main control unit 40 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 42. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. Then, after the processing of S325, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

When the determination in S321 is NO, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the display combination is "RB" (S326). In S326, when the main control unit 40 determines that the display combination is not "RB" (when the determination in S326 is NO), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S330 described later.

On the other hand, in S326, when the main control unit 40 determines that the display combination is "RB" (when the determination in S326 is YES), the main control unit 40 refers to the bonus operating table and responds to the display combination. RB operation time processing is performed (S327). In this process, the RB game state flag corresponding to the game state flag storage area is stored.

Next, the main control unit 40 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S328). Then, the main control unit 40 turns off the RT1 game state flag and turns on the RT0 game state flag (S329). After the processing of S329, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus operation check processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

Further, when the determination in S326 is NO, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (S330). In S330, when the main control unit 40 determines that the winning combination related to the re-game is not a prize (when the determination in S330 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 165) Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S330, when the main control unit 40 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (when the determination in S330 is YES), the main control unit 40 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S331). That is, the main control unit 40 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S331, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, for example, an interrupt process controlled by the main control unit 40 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 saves the register (S331). Next, the main control unit 40 performs an input port check process (S332). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a timer update process (S333). In this process, the main control unit 40 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main control unit 40 clears the game lock flag. Next, the main control unit 40 performs communication data transmission processing (S334). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 41 and the sub control circuit 42 as appropriate.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a reel control process (S335). In this process, the main control unit 40 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. In addition, three stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main control unit 40 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main control unit 40 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window), and then corresponds to the corresponding value. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S335, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs reel production (reel action) and lock control processing.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a lamp / 7-segment drive process (S336). In this process, the main control unit 40 drives and controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main control unit 40 performs a register reset process (S337). After that, the main control unit 40 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 to 248, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-control circuit (sub-control unit) 42 by using the program will be described.

[Operation processing when operating the start lever of the sub control circuit]
First, the procedure of the start lever operation process of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to the overall flow of the start lever operation shown in FIG. 188. The processing at the time of operating the start lever of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the sub CPU 81 is performed when the sub control circuit 42 receives the start command.

First, when the start lever is operated, the sub CPU 81 erases the navigation information (S501). This navigation information is information for controlling the lamp and the liquid crystal display device 11 when navigating.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB is being carried over (S502). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S502 that the BB is being carried over (when the determination in S502 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S512 described later.

On the other hand, in S502, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB is not carried over (when the determination in S502 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub CPU 81 is in the BB (S503). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S503 that it is not in the BB (when the determination in S503 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S505 described later.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S503 that it is in the BB (when the determination in S503 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process in the BB for each state (S504). Examples of each state in which the lottery process is performed during the BB include, during CZ, during the transition from the normal state, during ART (R_ART, RTG), during MICHI, during BB illegality, and the like. During the CZ transitioned from the normal state, the lottery process during the CZ (normal time BB) (see FIGS. 189 to 191) is performed, and during the ART, the lottery process during the BB during the ART (FIGS. 196 to 199) is performed. Further, during MICHI, a lottery process during MICHI (see FIG. 195) is performed, and at the time of BB illegal, BB illegal process is performed.

When the determination in S503 is NO, or after the processing in S504, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is in the BB (S505). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S505 that it is in the BB (when the determination in S505 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S512 described later.

On the other hand, in S505, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not in the BB (when the determination in S505 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S506). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S506 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S506 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the BB winning flag (S507). The BB winning flag is a flag for grasping whether or not any one of BB 1 to BB 5 has won, and is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown). After the processing of S507, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S509 described later.

In S506, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S506 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the BB winning flag (S508). After the processing of S507 or after the processing of S508, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing at the time of transition to the sub game state (S509). The details of the sub-game state transition processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 201 to 205 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 normally performs a lottery process (S510). The details of the normal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 206 to 209 described later.

When S502 and S505 are YES determinations, or after the processing of S510, the sub CPU 81 performs the navigation setting processing for each state (S511). In this process, the type of navigation according to each state is determined, and the navigation information (navigation data) according to the determined navigation type is registered. After the process of S511, the sub CPU 81 ends the entire flow when the start lever is operated.

As the navigation according to each state, for example, a navigation that shifts to the RT3 gaming state at the time of R_ART and maintains the RT3 gaming state, a navigation that shifts to the RT4 gaming state at the start of specialization, and an RT4 gaming state during specialization. There is a navigation that maintains the above, a navigation that shifts to the RT3 game state at the end of specialization, and a navigation related to a specific lip during BB and ART. In addition, during BB and ART, navigation is basically performed in which the specific lip is not stopped and displayed. However, when "with conversion" is won in the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process and the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process described later, a navigation for stopping and displaying the specific lip is performed.

In this embodiment, navigation related to a specific lip is performed during BB and ART. However, the navigation related to the specific lip according to the present invention may be performed during normal operation. Specifically, a specific lip navigation lottery table may be provided during normal times, and when the "execution of the specific lip navigation" is won, the specific lip may be stopped and displayed.

[Lottery processing during CZ (normal time BB)]
Next, the CZ (normal time BB) lottery process performed in S504 in the overall flow during the start lever operation (see FIG. 188) will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. The CZ (normal time BB) middle lottery process is performed at the time of the BB middle lottery process (S504) for each state in the CZ that has shifted from the normal state.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of temporary payouts in BB is less than "45" (S521). The number of temporary payouts during BB is the number of medals (game media) paid out during BB. In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals (game medium) is determined during BB, the number of medals to be paid out is counted when the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination is stopped and displayed. , The number of temporary payouts during BB.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the BB ends when the payout of medals in the BB (the number of temporary payouts in the BB) reaches 45 or more. Then, by setting the end condition of BB to 44 medals (or more), which is close to the total number of medals obtained when the symbol combination of 9 bell roles is displayed 5 times, the other roles (rare roles) The number of times the symbol combination can be displayed can be increased.

In S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts in the BB is not less than "45" (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (normally in the BB) lottery process and performs the process. Move to S505 of the overall flow (see FIG. 188) when the start lever is operated.

In S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts in BB is less than "45" (when the determination in S521 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 1 or more (when the determination is YES). S522). In S522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (when the determination in S522 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S529 described later.

On the other hand, in S522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 1 or more (when the determination in S522 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S523). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103) is referred to, and the EX points for B_RUSH are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S523 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S524). The B_RUSH EX point counter is a counter for managing the total value of the B_RUSH EX points.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S525). In S525, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S525 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S528 described later.

On the other hand, in S525, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S525 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S526). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S526 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S527). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S525 is NO, or after the processing in S527, the sub CPU 81 performs the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery processing in BB (S528). The details of the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 192 described later.

When the determination in S522 is NO, or after the processing in S528, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S529). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S529 that the PTR stock is not 0 (when the determination in S529 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S549 (see FIG. 190) described later.

On the other hand, in S529, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 0 (when the determination in S529 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the FS point counter in CZ is 100 or more. (S530). In S530, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the FS point counter in CZ is not 100 or more (when the determination in S530 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S543 (see FIG. 190) described later.

In S530, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the FS point counter in CZ is 100 or more (when the determination in S530 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the specified point in CZ (S531). ). In this process, after reaching the specified point in CZ, the PTR stock lottery table (see FIG. 70) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S531 is the winning of the PTR stock (S532). In S532, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not a win (when the determination in S532 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S542 (see FIG. 190) described later.

On the other hand, in S532, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is a win (when the determination in S532 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of the PTR win (S533). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S533 in the sub RAM 83 (S534).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S535). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. That is, in S535, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S535 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S536).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S537). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs specialization start processing (S538). The details of the specialization start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S539). In S539, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S525 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S542 described later.

On the other hand, in S539, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S539 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S540). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S526 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S541). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S532 and S539 are NO determination, or after the processing of S541, the sub CPU 81 performs a specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery processing in BB (S542). The details of the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 192 described later.

When the determination in S530 is NO, or after the processing in S542, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the FS point counter in CZ is less than 100 (S543). In S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the FS point counter in CZ is not less than 100 (when the determination in S543 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S549 described later.

On the other hand, in S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the FS point counter in CZ is less than 100 (when the determination in S543 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the FS point acquisition lottery process in CZ (S544). .. In this process, the FS point acquisition lottery table in CZ (see FIG. 67) is referred to, and the FS points are determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the FS point counter in CZ is 100 or more (S545). In S545, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the FS point counter in CZ is not 100 or more (when the determination in S545 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S548 described later.

In S545, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the FS point counter in CZ is 100 or more (when the determination in S545 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART grade lottery process (S546). In this process, the ART grade lottery table (see FIG. 71) is referred to, and the ART grade type is determined by lottery based on the mode type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the ART grade type determined in S546 in the sub RAM 83, and sets LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub game state (S547). Further, in the process of S547, the ART preparation flag is turned off.

In the BB during ART, when the BB ends without winning the RB, the ART is started (restarted) in the RT game state of the RT0 game state. The RT0 gaming state is a disadvantageous state for the player because the probability that the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) is determined is lower than that in the RT3 gaming state, and the number of medals consumed increases. Therefore, if ART is started (restarted) in the RT0 game state, the number of games (number of games) in ART progresses in a state disadvantageous to the player, and the benefit of ART (high probability of replay in RT3 game state + AT) is obtained. The ART may end without receiving it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the RT0 game state, the counting of the number of games (the number of games) in ART is not started, and an ART preparation flag is provided to manage this state.

In this embodiment, ART may be started without going through the BB. In this case, counting of the number of games (number of games) in ART is started from the RT1 game state. However, as the game machine according to the present invention, when ART is started without going through the BB, even if the counting of the number of games (the number of games) in ART is started after shifting to the RT3 game state. Good.

When the determination in S545 is NO, or after the processing in S547, the sub CPU 81 performs the specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in BB (S548). The details of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 194 described later.

When the determination in S529 and S543 is NO, or after the processing of S548, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of winning combinations to the number of provisional payouts (S549).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of temporary payouts in BB is "45" or more (S550). In S550, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts in the BB is not "45" or more (when the determination in S550 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (normally in the BB) lottery process and performs the process. Move to S505 of the overall flow (see FIG. 188) when the start lever is operated.

On the other hand, in S550, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts in BB is "45" or more (when the determination in S550 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is the normal state. (S551). In S551, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not the normal state (when the determination in S551 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (normal time BB) lottery process and starts the process. Move to S505 of the overall flow during operation (see FIG. 188).

In S551, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is the normal state (when the determination in S551 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has a total value of 100 or more FS points and initial FS points in CZ. Whether or not it is determined (S552). In S552, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the total value of the FS points and the initial FS points in CZ is not 100 or more (when the determination in S552 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S555 described later.

On the other hand, in S552, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the total value of the FS points and the initial FS points in CZ is 100 or more (when the determination in S552 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART great lottery process (S553). ). In this process, the ART grade lottery table (see FIG. 71) is referred to, and the ART grade type is determined by lottery based on the mode type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the ART grade type determined in S553 in the sub RAM 83, and sets the inside of LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub game state (S554). Further, in the process of S554, the ART preparation flag is turned off.

When the determination in S552 is NO, or after the processing in S554, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the total value of the FS points in the CZ and the initial FS points is less than 100 (S555). In S555, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the total value of the FS points in the CZ and the initial FS points is not less than 100 (when the determination in S555 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (normal time BB) lottery process. Then, the process is transferred to S505 of the overall flow (see FIG. 188) when the start lever is operated.

On the other hand, in S555, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the total value of the FS points in the CZ and the initial FS points is less than 100 (when the determination in S555 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART lottery process at the end of the CZ. (S556). In this process, the winning or non-winning of R_ART is determined by lottery based on the total value of the FS points in the CZ and the initial FS points with reference to the ART lottery table at the end of CZ (see FIG. 68).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S556 is the winning of R_ART (S557). In S557, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S556 is not the winning of R_ART (when the determination of S557 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (normal time BB) lottery process and starts the process. Move to S505 of the overall flow during operation (see FIG. 188).

In S557, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S556 is the winning of R_ART (when the determination in S557 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART great lottery process (S558). In this process, the ART grade lottery table (see FIG. 71) is referred to, and the ART grade type is determined by lottery based on the mode type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the ART grade type determined in S558 in the sub RAM 83, and sets LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub game state (S559). Further, in the process of S559, the ART preparation flag is turned off. After the processing of S559, the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (normal time BB) lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S505 of the entire flow during the start lever operation (see FIG. 188).

[Specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery processing in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RB is being carried over (S561). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S561 that the RB is not being carried over (when the determination in S561 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in the BB.

On the other hand, in S561, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RB is being carried over (when the determination in S561 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI is running up (S562). That is, it is determined whether or not the level of R_ART transferred via MICHI (BB5) is being upgraded toward LV.5 (PTR).

In S562, when the sub CPU 81 determines that MICHI is running up (when the determination in S562 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB.

In the BB specific lip navigation conversion lottery process, when the F_RT4 specific lip is won, it is determined whether or not to stop and display the symbol combination related to the specific lip according to the points acquired by the lottery (whether or not to perform navigation). In the present embodiment, unless the points above a certain value are determined, it is not determined to stop and display (navigate) the symbol combination related to the specific lip. Therefore, the stop display of the symbol combination related to the specific lip is substantially equivalent to the addition of points of a certain value or more. That is, from the appearance of the player, it is possible to give the impression that points of a certain value or more are added by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the specific lip.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total points have already reached the specified value (for example, 100) at the time of reaching the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB, and the points are not accumulated. However, occasionally, by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the specific lip, it seems that points are accumulated (it is guessed that the points have reached the specified value), so that the symbol combination related to the specific lip is displayed. It is decided whether or not to stop and display (whether or not to perform navigation). As described above, in the present embodiment, although there is no substantive significance (points are not accumulated), in order to perform the same behavior as the BB specific lip navigation conversion lottery process, the BB specific lip navigation conversion fake A lottery process is provided.

The gaming machine according to the present invention may notify that the total points have reached the specified value (the level up has been confirmed). In this case, even if the symbol combination related to the specific lip is stopped and displayed by the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB after notifying that the total points have reached the specified value (even if the navigation is performed), the meaning is meaningful. Therefore, it is possible not to perform the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB. Further, since the level up to LV.5 is confirmed during the MICHI run-up in the present embodiment, the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery (S564) during BB is not performed.

On the other hand, in S562, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 is not running up to MICHI (when the determination in S562 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is in the RT01 gaming state, the maintenance lip (win number 1) or the RT3 transition lip (win number). It is determined whether or not it is the winning of 8 to 13) (S563).

In S563, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the maintenance lip (win number 1) or the RT3 transition lip (win number 8 to 13) during the RT01 gaming state is not the win (when the determination in S563 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines. Ends the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process during BB.

On the other hand, in S563, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the winning of the maintenance lip (win number 1) or the RT3 transition lip (win number 8 to 13) during the RT01 gaming state (when the determination in S563 is YES), the sub The CPU 81 performs a fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process during BB (S564). In this process, the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB (see FIG. 153) is referred to, and whether or not the specific lip navigation is converted is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S564 is “with conversion” (S565). In S565, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S564 is not "with conversion" (without conversion) (when S565 is determined to be NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB. To do.

On the other hand, in S565, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S564 is "with conversion" (when the determination in S565 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific lip navigation conversion flag (S566). When the specific lip navigation conversion flag is ON, navigation for stopping and displaying the specific lip is performed. After the process of S566, the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB.

[Specialization start processing]
Next, the specialization start process will be described with reference to FIG. 193.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a specialization type during activation (S571). In S571, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no special type during activation (when the determination in S571 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S580 described later.

On the other hand, in S571, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a special type during activation (when the determination in S571 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the special type during activation is "PREMIUM". (S572).

In S572, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specialization type during activation is "PREMIUM" (when the determination in S572 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "PREMIUM" in the next sub-game state (S573). .. After the processing of S573, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S580 described later.

On the other hand, in S572, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the activation specialization type is not "PREMIUM" (when the determination in S572 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the activation specialization type is "FIGHTING". Is determined (S574).

In S574, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specialization type during activation is "FIGHTING" (when the determination in S574 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "FIGHTING" in the next sub-game state (S575). .. After the processing of S575, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S580 described later.

On the other hand, in S574, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the special type during activation is not "FIGHTING" (when the determination in S574 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the special type during activation is "BURNING". Is determined (S576).

In S576, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specialization type during activation is "BURNING" (when the determination in S576 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "BURNING" in the next sub-game state (S577). .. After the processing of S577, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S580 described later.

On the other hand, in S576, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the active specialization type is not "BURNING" (when S576 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the active specialization type is "RTG". Is determined (S578).

In S578, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specialization type during activation is not "RTG" (when the determination in S578 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S580 described later. On the other hand, in S578, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specialization type during activation is "RTG" (when the determination in S578 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "RTG in progress" for the next sub-game state (in S578). S579).

When the determination in S571 and S578 is NO, or after the processing of S573, S575, S575 and S579, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a specialization type during activation (S580). In S580, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a specialization type during activation (when the determination in S580 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start process.

On the other hand, in S580, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no special type during activation (when the determination in S580 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the head of the PTR stock is "PREMIUM" ( S581).

In S581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is "PREMIUM" (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "PREMIUM in progress" for the next sub-game state (S582). After the process of S582, the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start process.

On the other hand, in S581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is not "PREMIUM" (when the determination of S581 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the head of the PTR stock is "FIGHTING". (S583).

In S583, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is "FIGHTING" (when the determination in S583 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "FIGHTING in" for the next sub-game state (S584). After the process of S584, the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start process.

On the other hand, in S583, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is not "FIGHTING" (when the determination of S583 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the head of the PTR stock is "BURNING". (S585).

In S585, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is not "BURNING" (when the determination in S585 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start process. On the other hand, in S585, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is "BURNING" (when the determination in S585 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "BURNING in progress" for the next sub-game state (S586). ). After the process of S586, the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start process.

[Specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in BB will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RB is being carried over (S591). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S591 that the RB is not being carried over (when the determination in S591 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in the BB.

On the other hand, in S591, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RB is being carried over (when the determination in S591 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI is running up (S592). That is, in R_ART that has been transferred via MICHI (BB5), it is determined whether or not the level is being improved toward LV.5 (PTR).

In S592, when the sub CPU 81 determines that MICHI is running up (when the determination in S592 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB specific lip navigation conversion lottery process.

On the other hand, in S592, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 is not running up to MICHI (when the determination in S592 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is in the RT01 gaming state, the maintenance lip (win number 1) or the RT3 transition lip (win number). It is determined whether or not it is the winning of 8 to 13) (S593).

In S593, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the maintenance lip (winning number 1) or the RT3 transition lip (winning number 8 to 13) during the RT01 gaming state is not the winning (when the determination in S593 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines. Ends the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process during BB.

On the other hand, in S593, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the maintenance lip (winning number 1) or the RT3 transition lip (winning number 8 to 13) during the RT01 gaming state is the winning (when the determination in S593 is YES), the sub The CPU 81 performs a specific lip navigation conversion lottery process during BB (S594). In this process, the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB (see FIGS. 151 and 152) is referred to, and based on the total value of the FS points, it is determined by lottery whether or not the specific lip navigation is converted.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S594 is "with conversion" (S595). In S595, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S594 is not "with conversion" (without conversion) (when S595 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process in BB. To do.

On the other hand, in S595, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S594 is "with conversion" (when the determination in S595 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific lip navigation conversion flag (S596). After the process of S596, the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in BB.

[Lottery processing during MICHI]
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the lottery process during MICHI performed in S504 in the overall flow when the start lever is operated (see FIG. 188) will be described. The MICHI middle lottery process is performed at the time of the BB middle lottery process (S504) for each state in MICHI.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of temporary payouts in BB is less than "45" (S601). In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts during BB is not less than "45" (when the determination in S601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery process during MICHI and performs the process as a whole when the start lever is operated. Transfer to S505 of the flow (see FIG. 188).

In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts in the BB is less than "45" (when the determination in S601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S602). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103) is referred to, and the EX points for B_RUSH are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S602 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S603).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S604 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S607 described later.

On the other hand, in S604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S604 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S605). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S605 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S606). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S604 is NO, or after the processing in S606, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the first game in which the BB starts (S607). When it is determined in S607 that it is not the first game in which the BB starts (when the determination in S607 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S617 described later.

On the other hand, in S607, when it is determined that it is the first game to start BB (when the determination in S607 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub-game state is the normal state (S608). In the process of S608, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is the normal state (when the determination in S608 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.1 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S609). After the processing of S609, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S617 described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S608, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not the normal state (when the determination in S608 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has LV.1 to LV.1 to 4 in which the current sub game state is R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is (S610). In S610, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not LV.1 to 4 of R_ART (when the determination in S610 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S614 described later.

In S610, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV.1 to 4 of R_ART (when the determination in S610 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is ON. (S611). The MICHI flag is a flag for managing whether or not the R_ART has been migrated via MICHI (BB5), and is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown). This MICHI flag is turned ON when C_BB5 is determined as an internal winning combination and the symbol combination corresponding to C_BB5 is stopped and displayed. Further, the MICHI flag is turned off when LV.5 (PTR) is started in the R_ART shifted after the end of "MICHI".

In S611, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is ON (when the determination in S611 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S612). After the process of S612, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S617 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S611 that the MICHI flag is not ON (when the determination in S611 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S613). After the process of S613, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S617 described later.

When the determination in S610 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub-game state is LV.5 or B_RUSH of B_ART (S614). When it is determined in S614 that the current sub-game state is LV.5 or B_RUSH of B_ART (when the determination in S614 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART as the next sub-game state. , The ART preparation flag is turned off (S615). After the process of S615, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S617 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S614 that the current sub-game state is not LV.5 or B_RUSH of B_ART (when the determination in S614 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193. (S616).

After the processing of S609, S612, S613, S615, and S616, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of winning combinations to the number of provisional payouts (S617). After the processing of S617, the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery processing during MICHI, and shifts the processing to S505 of the overall flow at the time of starting lever operation (see FIG. 188).

[Lottery processing during BB during ART]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199, a lottery process during BB during ART performed in S504 in the overall flow during operation of the start lever (see FIG. 188) will be described. The BB lottery process during ART is performed at the BB lottery process (S504) for each state during ART.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of temporary payouts in BB is less than "45" (S621). In S621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts during BB is not less than "45" (when the determination in S621 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery process during BB during ART and operates the start lever. Move to S505 of the entire time flow (see FIG. 188).

On the other hand, in S621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts in BB is less than "45" (when the determination in S621 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 1 or more. (S622). In S622, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (when the determination in S622 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S632 described later.

On the other hand, in S622, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 1 or more (when the determination in S622 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S623). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103) is referred to, and the EX points for B_RUSH are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S623 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S624).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S625). In S625, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S625 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S628 described later.

On the other hand, in S625, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S625 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S626). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S626 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S527). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S625 is NO, or after the processing in S627, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is ON (S628).

In S628, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is ON (when the determination in S628 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S629). After the processing of S629, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S631 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S628 that the MICHI flag is not ON (when the determination in S628 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S630).

After the processing of S629 and S630, the sub CPU 81 performs the BB specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process described with reference to FIG. 192 (S631).

When the determination in S622 is NO, or after the processing in S631, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S632). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S632 that the PTR stock is not 0 (when the determination in S632 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S678 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S632, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 0 (when the determination in S632 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more. (S633). In S633, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S633 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S653 (see FIG. 197) described later.

On the other hand, in S633, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S633 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the specified point (S634). ). In this process, after reaching the specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (see FIGS. 107 to 111) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S634 is the winning of the PTR stock (S635). In S635, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S634 is not the winning result of the PTR stock (when the determination in S635 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S645 (see FIG. 197) described later.

On the other hand, in S635, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S634 is the winning of the PTR stock (when the determination of YES in S635), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization type lottery processing at the time of winning the PTR (S636). ). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S636 in the sub RAM 83 (S637).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S638). In this process, the EX points for B_RUSH are determined by lottery based on the level of the transfer destination with reference to the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S638 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S639).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S640). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S641).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S642). In S642, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S642 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S645 described later.

On the other hand, in S642, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S642 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S643). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S643 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S644). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S635 and S642 is NO, or after the processing in S644, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S634 is the winning of the PTR stock (S645). In S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S634 is the winning result of the PTR stock (when the determination in S645 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S652 described later.

On the other hand, in S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S634 is the winning result of the PTR stock (when the determination in S645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is in the current sub-game state waiting for the end of R_ART or R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is in LV.1 (S646).

In S646, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of R_ART or in LV.1 of R_ART (when the determination in S646 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the R_ART as the next sub game state. LV.2 is set and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S647).

On the other hand, in S646, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not waiting for the end of R_ART or in LV.1 of R_ART (when the determination in S646 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the current sub game state. It is determined whether or not it is in LV.2 of R_ART (S648).

In S648, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub-game state is in LV.2 of R_ART (when the determination in S648 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is in LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub-game state. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S649).

On the other hand, in S648, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in LV.2 of R_ART (when the determination in S648 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the current sub game state of LV.3 of R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is inside (S650).

In S650, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in LV.3 of R_ART (when the determination in S650 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S652 described later. On the other hand, in S650, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is in LV.3 of R_ART (when the determination in S650 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the LV. Of R_ART as the next sub game state. Set to 4 and turn off the ART preparation flag (S651).

When S645 is a YES determination, S650 is a NO determination, or after the processing of S647, S649, and S651, the sub CPU 81 performs the BB specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process described with reference to FIG. 192 (S652).

When the determination in S633 is NO, or after the processing in S652, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the EX point in R_ART is less than 100 (S653). In S653, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the EX point during R_ART is not less than 100 (when the determination in S653 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S678 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S653, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the EX points in R_ART are less than 100 (when the determination in S653 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process in BB (S654). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in BB (see FIGS. 104 and 105) is referred to, and the EX points in R_ART are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the EX point in R_ART determined in S654 to the EX point counter in R_ART (S655). Then, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the EX point during R_ART is 100 or more (S656). In S656, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the EX point during R_ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S656 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S656, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the EX point during R_ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S656 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is in the current sub-game state waiting for the end of R_ART or the LV of R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is in 1 (S657).

In S657, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of R_ART or in LV.1 of R_ART (when the determination in S657 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the R_ART as the next sub game state. LV.2 is set and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S658). After the processing of S658, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S657, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in R_ART end waiting or in LV.1 of R_ART (when S657 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 has the current sub game state. It is determined whether or not it is in LV.2 of R_ART (S659).

In S659, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is in LV.2 of R_ART (when the determination in S659 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is in LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S660). After the processing of S660, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S659, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in LV.2 of R_ART (when the determination in S659 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the current sub game state of LV.3 of R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is inside (S661).

In S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub-game state is in LV.3 of R_ART (when the determination in S661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is in LV.4 of R_ART as the next sub-game state. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S662). After the processing of S662, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in LV.3 of R_ART (when the determination in S661 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the current sub game state of LV.4 of R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is inside (S663).

In S663, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in LV.4 of R_ART (when the determination in S663 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S663, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is in LV.4 of R_ART (when the determination in S663 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR. Do (S664). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S664 in the sub RAM 83 (S665).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S666). In this process, the EX points for B_RUSH are determined by lottery based on the level of the transfer destination with reference to the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S666 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S667).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S668). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S669).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S670). In S670, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S670 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S670, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S670 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S671). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S671 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S672). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S656, S663, and S670 are determined to be NO, or after processing S658, S660, S662, and S672, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the EX point during R_ART is less than 100 (S673). In S673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the EX point during R_ART is not less than 100 (when the determination in S673 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S677 described later.

On the other hand, in S673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the EX point during R_ART is less than 100 (when the determination in S673 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is waiting for the end of R_ART. Is determined (S674).

In S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of R_ART (when the determination in S674 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.1 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S675). After the processing of S675, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S677 described later.

On the other hand, in S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not waiting for the end of R_ART (when the determination in S674 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S676). ).

When the determination in S673 is NO, or after the processing of S675 and S676, the sub CPU 81 performs the specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in BB described with reference to FIG. 194 (S677).

When the determination in S632 and S653 is NO, or after the processing of S677, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of winning combinations to the number of provisional payouts (S678). After the processing of S678, the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery processing at the time of BB during ART, and shifts the processing to S505 of the entire flow at the time of starting lever operation (see FIG. 188).

[BB Illegal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the BB illegal process performed in S504 in the overall flow when the start lever is operated (see FIG. 188) will be described. This BB illegal process is performed when the BB winning flag is OFF in S504 in the overall flow (see FIG. 188) when the start lever is operated.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of temporary payouts in BB is less than "45" (S681). In S681, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts in the BB is not less than "45" (when the determination in S681 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB illegal process and starts the process when the start lever is operated. Move to S505 of (see FIG. 188).

On the other hand, in S681, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of temporary payouts in BB is less than "45" (when the determination in S681 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the number of winning combinations to the number of temporary payouts. (S682). After the processing of S682, the sub CPU 81 ends the BB illegal processing, and shifts the processing to S505 of the entire flow during the start lever operation (see FIG. 188).

[Processing when transitioning to sub-game state]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 201 to 205, the sub-game state transition processing performed in S509 in the overall flow during start lever operation (see FIG. 188) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 sets the current sub-game state to the previous sub-game state (S701).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub-game state and the next sub-game state are different (S702). In S702, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state and the next sub game state are not different (when the determination in S702 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S776 (see FIG. 205) described later. ..

On the other hand, in S702, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state and the next sub game state are different (when the determination in S702 is YES), the sub CPU 81 initializes the precursor game type and determines the number of precursor games. Set to 0 (S703).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub-game state is waiting for the end of ART and the next sub-game state is the normal state (S704). In S704, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the ART to end and the next sub game state is not the normal state (when the determination in S704 is NO), the sub CPU 81 processes the process of S710 described later. I do.

On the other hand, in S704, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of ART and the next sub game state is the normal state (when the determination in S704 is YES), the sub CPU 81 hits the ART directly. It is determined whether or not the flag is OFF (S705). The direct hit ART is to directly shift from the normal state to the R_ART without going through the BB, and the direct hit ART flag is a flag for grasping whether or not the direct hit ART is won, and various flags (not shown) are stored. Stored in the area. In S705, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the direct hit ART flag is OFF (when the determination in S705 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S710 described later.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S705 that the direct hit ART flag is not OFF (when the determination in S705 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the direct hit ART flag and sets the direct hit ART winning grade to the ART grade (when the direct hit ART flag is determined to be NO). S706). Further, in the process of S706, LV.3 of R_ART is set in the next sub-game state.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S707). In S707, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S707 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S708). After the processing of S708, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S710 described later.

On the other hand, in S707, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S707 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the ART preparation flag (S709).

When the determination in S704 is NO, or after the processing of S708 and S709, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub-game state is in the normal state (S710). In S710, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in the normal state (when the determination in S710 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S713 described later.

On the other hand, in S710, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in the normal state (when the determination in S710 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the next specific mode MAP lottery process (S711). In this process, the next specific mode MAP lottery table (see FIGS. 59 and 60) is referred to, and the map type is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "0" as the specific mode MAP access number, and sets the specific mode on the MAP as the next specific mode (S712).

When the determination in S710 is NO, or after the processing in S712, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub-game state is in LV.1 of R_ART (S713). In S713, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub-game state is not in LV.1 of R_ART (when the determination in S713 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S718 described later.

On the other hand, in S713, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in LV.1 of R_ART (when the determination in S713 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has the MICHI flag OFF and the current sub game. It is determined whether or not the state is waiting for the end of ART (S714). When the determination in S714 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S717 described later.

On the other hand, in S714, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is OFF and the current sub game state is not waiting for ART end (when the determination in S714 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is initially EX at the time of level transition. The point lottery process is performed (S715). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the level of the transition destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S715 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S716).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S717).

When the determination in S713 is NO, or after the processing in S717, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub-game state is in LV.2 of R_ART (S718). In S718, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub-game state is not in LV.2 of R_ART (when the determination in S718 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S726 described later.

On the other hand, in S718, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in LV.2 of R_ART (when the determination in S718 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is OFF. (S719). In S719, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is not OFF (when the determination in S719 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S722 described later.

On the other hand, in S719, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is OFF (when the S719 is a YSE determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S720). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the level of the transition destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S720 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S721).

When the determination in S713 is NO, or after the processing in S721, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S722).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.2 loop rate lottery process (S723). In this process, the LV.2 loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 112 and 113) is referred to, and the type of the LV.2 loop rate is determined by lottery based on the grade type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.2 loop lottery process (S724). In this process, the LV.2 loop lottery table (see FIG. 114) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the LV.2 loop is determined by lottery based on the type of the LV.2 loop rate.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.2 opponent lottery process (S725). In this process, the opponent lottery table (LV.2) (see FIG. 115) is referred to, and the opponent type is determined by lottery based on the type of the LV.2 loop rate.

When the determination in S718 is NO, or after the processing in S725, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub-game state is in LV.3 of R_ART (S726). In S726, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in LV.3 of R_ART (when the determination in S726 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S731 described later.

On the other hand, in S726, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in LV.3 of R_ART (when the determination in S726 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is OFF. (S727). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S727 that the MICHI flag is not OFF (when the determination in S727 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S730 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S727 that the MICHI flag is OFF (when the determination in S727 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S728). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the level of the transition destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S728 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S729).

When the determination in S727 is NO, or after the processing in S729, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S730).

When the determination in S726 is NO, or after the processing in S730, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub-game state is in LV.4 of R_ART (S731). In S731, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub-game state is not in LV.4 of R_ART (when the determination in S731 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S748 described later.

On the other hand, in S731, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in LV.4 of R_ART (when the determination in S731 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is OFF. (S732). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S732 that the MICHI flag is not OFF (when the determination in S732 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S747 described later.

On the other hand, in S732, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is OFF (when the determination in S732 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S733). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the level of the transition destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S733 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S734).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the next LV.4 opponent mode to the current LV.4 opponent mode (S735).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.4 opponent mode lottery process (S736). In this process, the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) (see FIG. 116) is referred to, and the opponent mode is determined by lottery based on the previous opponent mode.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the opponent mode determined in S736 to the next LV.4 opponent mode (S737).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (S738). In S738, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S738 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S747 described later.

On the other hand, in S738, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S738 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process when the PTR is won (when the PTR is won). S739). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the type of the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S739 in the sub RAM 83 (S740).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S741). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the level of the transition destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S741 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S742).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S743). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S744). In S744, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S744 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S747 described later.

On the other hand, in S744, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S744 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S745). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S745 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S746). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S730, S738, and S744 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S746, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S747).

When the determination in S731 is NO, or after the processing in S747, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub-game state is in preparation for specialization (S748). In S748, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in preparation for specialization (when the determination in S748 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S760 (see FIG. 204) described later.

On the other hand, in S748, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub-game state is in preparation for specialization (when the determination in S748 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the special preparation preparation flag (S749). ..

If it is decided to start "RTG" during normal operation (RT0 to RT2 gaming state) and immediately start "RTG", RTG will be started in RT0 to RT2 gaming state. In the present embodiment, in the "RTG", the "PTR" is stocked every time the symbol combination corresponding to the F_RT4 special lip 3 or the F_RT4 special lip 4 is stopped and displayed. The F_RT4 special lip 3 and the F_RT4 special lip 4 are internal winning combinations that can be won in the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "RTG" is started after the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state by the navigation.

Further, in the present embodiment, each time the symbol combination corresponding to the F_RT4 special lip 1 or the F_RT4 special lip 2 is stopped and displayed in the "PREMIUM" of the "PTR", the addition of the number of games in the "PTR" is determined. .. The F_RT4 special lip 3 and the F_RT4 special lip 4 are internal winning combinations that can be won in the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "PTR" is started after the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state by the navigation. As a result, in the present embodiment, a special preparation preparation flag is provided in order to manage the timing of starting "RTG" or "PTR".

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is no additional specialization type during activation (S750). When it is determined in S750 that there is no additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S750 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S760 (see FIG. 204) described later.

On the other hand, in S750, when it is determined that there is no additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S750 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the head of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation, and sets the PTR stock. Reduce by 1 (S751).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the additional specialization type is "PREMIUM" during activation (S752). In S752, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional specialization type is "PREMIUM" during activation (when the determination in S752 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S759 described later.

On the other hand, in S752, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional specialization type during activation is not "PREMIUM" (when the determination in S752 is NO), whether the sub CPU 81 has the additional specialization type during activation "FIGHTING". Whether or not it is determined (S753). In S753, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional specialization type is "FIGHTING" during activation (when the determination in S753 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S757 described later.

On the other hand, in S753, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional specialization type during activation is not "FIGHTING" (when the determination in S753 is NO), whether the sub CPU 81 has the additional specialization type during activation "BURNING". Whether or not it is determined (S754).

In S754, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional specialization type during activation is not "BURNING" (when the determination in S754 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets "BURNING" as the additional specialization type during activation, and specially Set "5" in the guaranteed game number counter (S755). The special guarantee game number counter is a counter for managing the special guarantee game number in PTR. After the processing of S755, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S760 described later.

In S754, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional specialization type is "BURNING" during activation (when the determination in S754 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "5" in the specialization guaranteed game number counter (when the determination is YES). S756). After the processing of S756, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S760 described later.

When the determination in S753 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets “5” in the special guarantee game number counter (S757). Then, the sub CPU 81 performs a loop rate lottery process during FIGHTING (S758). In this process, the FIGHT loop rate lottery table (see FIG. 123) is referred to, and the type of the FIGHT loop rate is determined by lottery. After the processing of S758, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S760 described later.

When the determination in S752 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets "10" in the special guarantee game number counter and sets "50" in the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S759).

When the determination in S748 and S750 is NO, or after the processing of S755, S756, S758 and S759, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is in RTG (S760). In S760, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub-game state is not in the RTG (when the determination in S760 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S764 described later.

On the other hand, in S760, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub-game state is in RTG (when the determination in S760 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an additional specialization type during activation (when the determination is YES in S760). S761). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S761 that there is an additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S761 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S764 described later.

On the other hand, in S761, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S761 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the head of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation. , PTR stock is subtracted by 1 (S762).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the special guarantee game number counter, and sets "50" in the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S763).

When S760 is a NO determination, S761 is a YES determination, or after the processing of S763, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is in "PREMIUM" (S764). In S764, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub-game state is not "PREMIUM" (when the determination in S764 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S768 (see FIG. 205) described later.

On the other hand, in S764, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is "PREMIUM" (when the determination in S764 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an additional specialization type during activation. Determine (S765). In S765, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is an additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S765 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S768 (see FIG. 205) described later.

On the other hand, in S765, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S765 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the head of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation and PTR. The stock is subtracted by 1 (S766).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "10" in the special guarantee game number counter, and sets "50" in the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S767).

When S764 is a NO determination, S765 is a YES determination, or after the processing of S767, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub-game state is in "FIGHTING" (S768). In S768, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in "FIGHTING" (when the determination in S768 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S773 described later.

On the other hand, in S768, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in "FIGHTING" (when the determination in S768 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an additional specialization type during activation. Determine (S769). In S769, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is an additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S769 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S773 described later.

On the other hand, in S769, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S769 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the head of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation and PTR. The stock is reduced by 1 (S770).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "5" in the special guarantee game number counter (S771). Then, the sub CPU 81 performs a loop rate lottery process during FIGHTING (S772). In this process, the FIGHT loop rate lottery table (see FIG. 123) is referred to, and the type of the FIGHT loop rate is determined by lottery.

When S768 is a NO determination, S769 is a YES determination, or after the processing of S772, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is in "BURNING" (S773). In S773, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in "BURNING" (when the determination in S773 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S777 described later.

On the other hand, in S773, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is "BURNING" (when the determination in S773 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an additional specialization type during activation. Determine (S774). In S774, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is an additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S774 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S777 described later.

On the other hand, in S774, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no additional specialization type during activation (when the determination in S774 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the head of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation and PTR. The stock is reduced by 1 (S775). Then, the sub CPU 81 sets "5" in the special guarantee game number counter (S776).

When S773 is a NO determination, S774 is a YES determination, or after the processing of S7776, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub-game state is in LV.5 of R_ART (S777). In S777, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in LV.5 of R_ART (when the determination in S777 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S779 described later.

On the other hand, in S777, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in LV.5 of R_ART (when the determination in S777 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets none in the additional specialization type during activation. Then, the MICHI flag is turned off (S778).

When the determination in S777 is NO, or after the processing in S778, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is in "B_RUSH" (S779). In the process of S779, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in "B_RUSH" (when the determination of S779 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S782 described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S779, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in "B_RUSH" (when the determination in S779 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "3" in the B_RUSH game number counter. (S780). Then, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the B_RUSH stock (S781).

When the determination in S779 is NO, or after the processing in S781, the sub CPU 81 sets the next sub-game state to the current sub-game state (S782). After the processing of S782, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of transition to the sub game state, and shifts the processing to S510 of the entire flow at the time of operating the start lever (see FIG. 188).

[Normal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 209, a normal lottery process performed in S510 in the overall flow during the start lever operation (see FIG. 188) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT game state after winning the previous game is the RT2 game state (S801). In S801, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state after winning the previous game is not the RT2 game state (when the determination in S801 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S807 described later.

On the other hand, in S801, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state after winning the previous game is the RT2 game state (when the determination in S801 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the direct hit ART high probability stock subtraction flag. Then, the RT2 game number counter is added by 1 (S802). The RT2 game number counter is a counter for managing the number of games in the RT2 game state.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the RT2 game number counter exceeds 30 (S803). In S803, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RT2 game number counter does not exceed 30 (when the determination in S803 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S807 described later.

On the other hand, in S803, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RT2 game number counter exceeds 30 (when the determination in S803 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has a direct hit ART high probability stock number counter value of 1 or more. It is determined whether or not it is (S804). The direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter is a counter for managing the stock number of the direct hit ART.

In S804, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of direct hit ART high probability stocks is 1 or more (when the determination in S804 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter (S805). ).

In S804, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of direct hit ART high probability stocks is not 1 or more (when the determination in S804 is NO), or after the processing of S805, the sub CPU 81 clears the RT2 game number counter (S806). .. That is, the value of the RT2 game number counter is set to 0.

When the determination in S803 and S801 is NO, or after the processing in S806, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state after winning the previous game is the RT2 gaming state (S807). In S807, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state after winning the previous game is not the RT2 game state (when the determination in S807 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S813 described later.

On the other hand, in S807, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state after winning the previous game is the RT2 game state (when the determination in S807 is YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the RT2 game number counter (S808). ).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the direct hit ART high probability stock subtraction flag is ON (S809). In S809, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the direct hit ART high probability stock subtraction flag is not ON (when the determination in S809 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S813 described later.

On the other hand, in S807, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the direct hit ART high probability stock subtraction flag is ON (when the determination in S809 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has a value of the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter of 1 or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S810).

In S810, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S810 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter. (S811).

In S810, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of direct hit ART high probability stocks is not 1 or more (when the determination in S810 is NO), or after the processing of S811, the sub CPU 81 turns off the direct hit ART high probability stock number subtraction flag. (S812).

When the determination in S807 and S809 is NO, or after the processing of S812, the sub CPU 81 sets the next specific mode to the current specific mode (S813).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S814). In S814, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S810 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S817 described later.

On the other hand, in S814, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S810 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a specific mode transition lottery process (S815). In this process, the mode type is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the specific mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 61 and 62).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the determined mode type, which is the lottery result of S815, as the next specific mode (S816).

When the determination in S814 is YES, or after the processing in S816, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of precursor is non-precursor (S817). In S817, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is not non-precursor (when the determination in S817 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S827 described later.

On the other hand, in S817, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is non-precursor (when the determination in S817 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT game state is the RT2 game state or the BB winning game. Whether or not it is determined (S818). In S818, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is not the RT2 game state or the BB winning game (when the determination in S818 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S827 described later.

In S818, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is the RT2 game state or the BB winning game (when the determination in S818 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART lottery process (S819). In this process, the winning or non-winning of R_ART is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the ART lottery table (see FIGS. 64 and 65).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S819 is the winning result of R_ART (S820). In S820, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S819 is not the winning result of R_ART (when the determination in S820 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S827 described later.

On the other hand, in S820, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S819 is the winning of R_ART (when the determination of YES in S820), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART grade lottery process (S821). In this process, the ART grade lottery table (see FIGS. 71 to 73) is referred to, and the grade type is determined by lottery based on the type of the specific mode. In the process of S821, an ART grade lottery table (direct hit ART) (not shown) is referred to.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result (determined grade type) of S821 as the grade of the direct hit ART, and turns on the direct hit ART flag (S822).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S823). In S823, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S823 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets ART precursors as the type of precursors (S824).

In S823, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S823 is YES), or after the processing of S824, does the sub CPU 81 have a value of 1 or more in the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter? Whether or not it is determined (S825). In S825, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S825 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S827 described later.

On the other hand, in S825, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S825 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter. 1 is subtracted (S826).

When S817, S818, S820, and S825 are determined to be NO, or after the processing of S826, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S827). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S827 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S827 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S846 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S827 that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S827 is YES), the sub CPU 81 initializes the type of precursor and turns off the direct hit ART high probability stock subtraction flag (when the determination is YES in S827). S828).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a win (S829). In S829, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S829 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S842 described later.

On the other hand, in S829, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (when the determination in S829 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns on the MICHI flag (S830).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an ART grade lottery process (S831). Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result (determined grade type) of S831 as the grade of ART (S832).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S833). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the level of the transition destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S833 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S834).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.4 opponent mode lottery process (S835). In this process, the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) (see FIG. 116) is referred to, and the opponent mode is determined by lottery based on the previous opponent mode.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S836). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR (S837). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity. Then, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S837 in the sub RAM 83 (S838).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S839). In S839, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S839 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S842 described later.

On the other hand, in S839, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S839 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S840). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S840 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S841). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S829 and S839 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S841, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) win is achieved (S842). In S842, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) win (when the determination in S842 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S846 described later.

On the other hand, in S842, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) win is not obtained (when the determination in S842 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the CZ initial FS point lottery process (S843). In this process, the CZ initial FS point lottery table (see FIG. 66) is referred to, and the initial FS point is determined by lottery based on the mode type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the specific mode MAP access position is final (S844). In S844, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specific mode MAP access position is the final (when the determination in S844 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S846 described later.

On the other hand, in S844, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specific mode MAP access position is not final (when the determination in S844 is NO), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the specific mode MAP access number and MAP to the next specific mode. The above specific mode is set (S845).

When S827 is a NO determination and S842 and S844 are YES determinations, after the processing of S845, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S846). In S846, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S846 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery process during normal operation, and performs the process as a whole flow when the start lever is operated (see FIG. 188). Move to S511 inside.

On the other hand, in S846, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S846 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of precursor is ART precursor (S847). In S847, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is not in the ART precursor (when the determination in S847 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S855 described later.

In S847, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the precursor type is in the ART precursor (when the determination in S847 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (S848). ). In S848, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (when the determination in S848 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S852 described later.

On the other hand, in S848, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state (when the determination in S848 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the RT gaming state is determined to be the RT0 gaming state). S849).

In S849, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S849 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART grade to the ART grade and turns off the direct hit ART flag. In addition, the next sub-game state is set to LV.3 of R_ART, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S850). After the processing of S850, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S855.

On the other hand, in S849, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S849 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART grade to the ART grade and turns off the direct hit ART flag. To. In addition, the next sub-game state is set to LV.3 of R_ART, and the ART preparation flag is turned ON (S851). After the processing of S851, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S855.

When the determination in S848 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART remaining game number counter is 0 (S852). In S852, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RT remaining game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S849 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S855 described later.

On the other hand, in S852, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RT remaining game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S849 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART grade to the ART grade and sets the direct hit ART flag. Is turned off. In addition, the next sub-game state is set to LV.3 of R_ART, and the ART preparation flag is turned ON (S853).

Next, the sub CPU 81 turns off the direct hit ART high probability stock number subtraction flag (S854).

When the determination in S847 and S852 is NO, or after the processing of S850, S851 and S853, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of precursor is in the ART precursor (S855). In S855, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is in the ART precursor (when the determination in S855 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery process during normal operation, and performs the process as a whole flow when the start lever is operated (when the start lever is operated. Move to S511 in (see FIG. 188).

In S855, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is not in the ART precursor (when the determination in S855 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (S856). .. In S856, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state (when the determination in S856 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery process during normal operation, and performs the process as a whole flow when the start lever is operated (FIG. 188) Transfer to S511.

In S856, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is the RT2 game state (when the determination in S856 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART remaining game number counter is 0. (S857). In S857, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART remaining game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S857 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery process during normal operation, and starts the process when the start lever is operated. (See FIG. 188) Move to S511.

In S857, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART remaining game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S857 is YES), is the sub CPU 81 having a value of 1 or more in the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter? Whether or not it is determined (S858).

In S858, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of direct hit ART high probability stocks is 1 or more (when the determination in S858 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter (S859). ).

In S859, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of direct hit ART high probability stocks is not 1 or more (when the determination in S858 is NO), or after the processing of S859, the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART high probability stock number subtraction flag. Turn it off (S860). After the processing of S860, the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery processing during normal operation, and shifts the processing to S511 in the overall flow during the start lever operation (see FIG. 188).

[Processing at the end of BB]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, BB end-time processing performed when various BBs are ended will be described. This BB end processing is performed when the sub-control circuit 42 receives the bonus end command in accordance with S313 described above.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S871). In S871, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S871 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S872). After the process of S872, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S878 described later.

On the other hand, in S871, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S871 is YES), is the sub CPU 81 in the sub gaming state LV.1 to 5 of R_ART? Whether or not it is determined (S873).

In S873, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub game state is not in LV. 1 to 5 of R_ART (when the determination in S873 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S874). After the processing of S874, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S878 described later.

On the other hand, in S873, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the sub game state is in LV. 1 to 5 of R_ART (when the determination in S873 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not RB is established (in RB). Whether or not the corresponding symbol combination has been displayed even once) is determined (S875).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S875 that the RB is established (when the determination in S875 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S876). After the processing of S876, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S878 described later.

On the other hand, in S875, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RB is not established (when the determination in S875 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns on the ART preparation flag (S877).

After the processing of S872, S874, S876, and S877, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S878). In S878, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S878 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S881 described later.

On the other hand, in S878, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S878 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub gaming state is "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING", or "BURNING". , "RTG" or not (S879).

In S879, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not any of "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING", "BURNING", and "RTG" (when S879 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 will be described later. The process of S884 is performed.

On the other hand, in S879, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is any one of "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING", "BURNING", and "RTG" (when S879 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 Sets special preparation for the next sub-game state (S880). After the processing of S880, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S884 described later.

When the determination in S878 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RB is established (whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the RB has been displayed even once) (S881). In S881, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RB is established (when the determination in S881 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S884 described later.

On the other hand, in S881, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RB is not established (when the determination in S881 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has the next sub-game state of "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING", "BURNING", "RTG". It is determined whether or not it is any of (S882).

In S882, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not any of "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING", "BURNING", and "RTG" (when S882 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 will be described later. The process of S884 is performed.

On the other hand, in S882, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is any one of "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING", "BURNING", and "RTG" (when S882 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 Sets special preparation for the next sub-game state (S883).

When S879 and S882 are NO determination, S881 is YES determination, or after the processing of S880 and S883, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB winning flag is ON (S884). In S884, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB winning flag is not ON (when the determination in S884 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB end processing.

On the other hand, in S884, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB winning flag is ON (when the determination in S884 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is in the normal state. (S885). In S885, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in the normal state (when the determination in S885 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB end processing.

On the other hand, in S885, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in the normal state (when the determination in S885 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a high-accuracy stock lottery process at the end of CZ (S886). .. In this process, the high probability stock lottery table at the end of CZ (see FIG. 69) is referred to, and the high probability stock number is determined by lottery based on the RT gaming state.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result (determined high probability stock number) of S886 to the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter (S887). After the processing of S887, the sub CPU 81 ends the BB end processing.

[Processing during LV.1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 to 214, the processing during LV.1 performed when the start lever is operated during LV.1 of R_ART will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is ON (S901). In S901, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not ON (when the determination in S901 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S904 described later.

On the other hand, in S901, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is ON (when the determination in S901 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. (S902). In S902, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S902 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S904 described later.

On the other hand, in S902, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S902 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S903).

When S901 is a NO determination, S902 is a YES determination, or after the processing of S903, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S904). In S904, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S904 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S907 described later.

On the other hand, in S904, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S904 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more. (S905). In S905, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S905 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S907 described later.

In S905, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S905 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the ART game number counter (S906).

When the determination in S904 and S905 is NO, or after the processing in S906, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 1 or more (S907). In S907, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (when the determination in S907 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S913 described later.

On the other hand, in S907, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 1 or more (when the determination in S907 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S908). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103) is referred to, and the EX points for B_RUSH are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the determined EX point for B_RUSH is added to the EX point counter for B_RUSH.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S909). In S909, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S909 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S912 described later.

On the other hand, in S909, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S909 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S910). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S910 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S911). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S909 is NO, or after the processing in S911, the sub CPU 81 performs the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in LV.1,3 (S912). The details of the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1 and 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 215 described later.

When the determination in S907 is NO, or after the processing in S912, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S913). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S913 that the PTR stock is not 0 (when the determination in S913 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S929 (see FIG. 213) described later.

On the other hand, in S913, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 0 (when the determination in S913 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the FS point counter during ART is 100 or more. (S914). In S914, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the FS point counter during ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S914 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S926 (see FIG. 213) described later.

In S914, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the FS point counter in CZ is 100 or more (when the determination in S914 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the middle specified point (S915). .. In this process, after reaching the specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.1) (see FIG. 107) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S915 is the winning of the PTR stock (S916). In S916, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not a win (when the determination in S916 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S925 (see FIG. 213) described later.

On the other hand, in S916, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is a win (when the determination in S916 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of the PTR win (S917). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S917 in the sub RAM 83 (S918).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S919). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. That is, in S919, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S919 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S920).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S921). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S922). In S922, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S922 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S925 described later.

On the other hand, in S922, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S922 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S923). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S923 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S924). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S916 and S922 is NO, or after the processing of S924, the sub CPU 81 performs the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in LV.1 and 3 (S925).

When the determination in S914 is NO, or after the processing in S925, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (S926). In S926, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not less than 100 (when the determination in S926 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S929 described later.

On the other hand, in S926, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (when the determination in S926 is YES), the sub CPU 81 draws EX points in LV.1, 3, and 4. Process (S927). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.1 (see FIGS. 77 to 79) is referred to, and EX points are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1, 3 and 5 (S928). The details of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1, 3 and 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 216 described later.

When the determination in S913 and S926 is NO, or after the processing in S928, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S929). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S929 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S929 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S940 described later.

On the other hand, in S929, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S929 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a winning in MICHI (BB5) (S930). In S930, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S930 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S940 described later.

On the other hand, in S930, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (when the determination in S930 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process when the PTR is a win (S931). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S931 in the sub RAM 83 (S932).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of PTR stocks is 1 (S933). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S933 that the number of PTR stocks is not 1 (when the determination in S933 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S940 described later.

On the other hand, in S933, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of PTR stocks is 1 (when the determination in S933 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S934). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. That is, in S934, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S934 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S935).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S936). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S937). In S937, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S937 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S940 described later.

On the other hand, in S937, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S937 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S938). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S938 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S939). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S929, S930, S933, and S937 are NO determination, or after the processing of S939, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S940). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S940 that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S940 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.1.

On the other hand, in S940, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S940 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S941). In S941, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S941 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1 intermediate processing.

In S941, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S941 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (S942). ). In S942, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S942 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.1.

In S942, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S942 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is ON (S943).

In S943, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is ON (when the determination in S943 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.2 of R_ART as the next sub game state and is preparing for ART. The flag is turned off (S944). After the processing of S944, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.1.

On the other hand, in S943, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is not ON (when the determination in S943 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of PTR stocks is 1 or more (S945).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S945 that the number of PTR stocks is 1 or more (when the determination in S945 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization transition process (S946). The details of the additional specialization transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 217 described later. After the processing of S946, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.1.

On the other hand, in S945, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of PTR stocks is not 1 or more (when the determination in S945 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more. (S947).

In S947, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S947 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.2 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S948). After the processing of S948, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.1.

On the other hand, in S947, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S947 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets the ART end waiting state in the next sub game state. (S949). After the processing of S949, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.1.

[LV.1,3 medium fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1, 3 will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the 1G (game) th or the final G (game) in LV.1 and 3 (S961). In S961, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the 1st G or the final G in LV.1,3 (when the determination in S961 is YES), the subCPU81 is subjected to the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3. To finish.

On the other hand, in S961, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the 1st G or the final G in LV.1 and 3 (when the determination in S961 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF. Is determined (S962). When it is determined in S962 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S962 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3.

When it is determined in S962 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S962 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI is running up (S963). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S963 that MICHI is running up (when the determination in S963 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3.

In S963, when it was determined that the sub CPU 81 was not running up to MICHI (when the determination in S963 was NO), the sub CPU 81 was awarded the winning numbers "14" to "24" by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167). Whether or not it is determined (S964). In S964, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers "14" to "24" have not been won (when the determination in S964 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3. To finish.

In S964, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers "14" to "24" have been won (when the determination in S964 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process during ART (S965). In this process, the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (LV.1,3) (see FIG. 159) during ART is referred to, and whether or not the specific lip navigation conversion is performed is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S965 is converted (S966). In S966, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S965 does not have conversion (when the determination in S966 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3.

On the other hand, in S966, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S965 is converted (when the determination in S966 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific lip navigation conversion flag (S967). After the process of S967, the sub CPU 81 ends the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3.

[Specified lip navigation conversion lottery processing in LV.1, 3, 5]
Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1, 3 and 5 will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the 1G (game) th or the final G (game) in LV.1 and 3 (S971). In S971, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the 1st G or the final G in LV.1,3 (when the determination in S971 is YES), the subCPU81 is selected by lottery for conversion in LV.1,3,5. End the process.

On the other hand, in S971, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the 1st G or the final G in LV.1 and 3 (when the determination in S971 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF. Is determined (S972). When it is determined in S972 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S972 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3,5.

When it is determined in S972 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S972 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI is running up (S973). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S973 that the MICHI is running up (when the determination in S973 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3,5.

In S973, when it was determined that the sub CPU 81 was not running up to MICHI (when the determination in S973 was NO), the sub CPU 81 was awarded the winning numbers "14" to "24" by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167). Whether or not it is determined (S974). In S974, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers "14" to "24" have not been won (when the determination in S974 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is selected for the specific lip navigation conversion lottery in LV.1,3,5. End the process.

In S974, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers "14" to "24" have been won (when the determination in S974 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a specific lip navigation conversion lottery process during ART (S975). In this process, the specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table during ART (see FIGS. 154 to 156) is referred to, and whether or not the specific Lipnavi conversion is performed is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S975 is converted (S976). In S976, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S975 does not have conversion (when the determination in S976 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3,5.

On the other hand, in S976, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S975 is converted (when the determination in S976 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific lip navigation conversion flag (S977). After the process of S977, the sub CPU 81 ends the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV.1,3,5.

[Additional specialization migration processing]
Next, the addition specialized transition process will be described with reference to FIG. 217.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (S981). In S981, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S981 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S983 described later.

On the other hand, in S981, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S981 is NO), the sub CPU 81 adds to the next sub-game state and is preparing for specialization. Set (S982). After the processing of S982, the sub CPU 81 ends the addition specialization transition processing.

When the determination in S981 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state and the RT3 transition lip is a win (S983). In S983, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT game state is the RT4 game state and the RT3 transition lip is a win (when the determination in S983 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is in the next sub game state. In addition to, the specialization preparation is set (S984). After the processing of S984, the sub CPU 81 ends the addition specialization transition processing.

On the other hand, in S983, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state and the RT3 transition lip is not a win (when the determination in S983 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is the head of the PTR stock. Is "PREMIUM" or not (S985).

In S985, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is "PREMIUM" (when the determination in S985 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S990 described later.

On the other hand, in S985, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is not "PREMIUM" (when the determination of S985 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the head of the PTR stock is "FIGHTING". (S986).

In S986, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is "FIGHTING" (when the determination in S986 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S989 described later.

On the other hand, in S986, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is not "FIGHTING" (when the determination of S986 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the head of the PTR stock is "BURNING". (S987).

In S987, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is not "BURNING" (when the determination in S987 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the addition specialization transition process.

On the other hand, in S987, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is "BURNING" (when the determination in S987 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "BURNING" in the next sub-game state (S988). .. After the processing of S988, the sub CPU 81 ends the addition specialization transition processing.

When the determination in S986 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets "FIGHTING" in the next sub game state (S989). After the processing of S989, the sub CPU 81 ends the addition specialization transition processing.

When the determination in S985 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets "PREMIUM" in the next sub game state (S990). After the processing of S990, the sub CPU 81 ends the addition specialization transition processing.

[LV.2 middle processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 218 to 220, the processing during LV.2 performed when the start lever is operated during LV.2 of R_ART will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is ON (S1001). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1001 that the ART preparation flag is not ON (when the determination in S1001 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1004 described later.

On the other hand, in S1001, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is ON (when the determination in S1001 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. (S1002). In S1002, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S1002 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1004 described later.

On the other hand, in S1002, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S1002 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S1003).

When S1001 is NO determination, S1002 is YES determination, or after the processing of S1003, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1004). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1004 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1004 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1007 described later.

On the other hand, in S1004, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1004 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more. (S1005). In S1005, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1005 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1007 described later.

In S1005, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S1005 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the ART game number counter (S1006).

When S1004 and S1005 are NO determination, or after the processing of S1006, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 1 or more (S1007). In S1007, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1007 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1012 described later.

On the other hand, in S1007, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 1 or more (when the determination in S1007 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S1008). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103) is referred to, and the EX points for B_RUSH are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the determined EX point for B_RUSH is added to the EX point counter for B_RUSH.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1009). In S1009, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1009 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S912 described later.

On the other hand, in S1009, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1009 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1010). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1010 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1011). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S1009 is NO, or after the processing in S1011, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S1012). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1012 that the PTR stock is not 0 (when the determination in S1012 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1026 (see FIG. 219) described later.

On the other hand, in S1012, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 0 (when the determination in S1012 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during ART is 100 or more. (S1013). In S1013, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1013 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1024 (see FIG. 219) described later.

In S1013, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S1013 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the specified point (S1014). In this process, after reaching the specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.2) (see FIG. 107) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S1014 is the winning of the PTR stock (S1015). In S1015, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not a win (when the determination in S1015 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1024 (see FIG. 219) described later.

On the other hand, in S1015, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is a win (when the determination in S1015 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of the PTR win (S1016). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1016 in the sub RAM 83 (S1017).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1018). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. That is, in S1018, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1018 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1019).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1020). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1021). In S1021, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1021 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1024 described later.

On the other hand, in S1021, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1021 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1022). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1022 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1023). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S1015 and S1021 is NO, or after the processing in S1023, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter in R_ART is less than 100 (S1024). In S1024, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not less than 100 (when the determination in S1024 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1026 described later.

On the other hand, in S1024, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (when the determination in S1024 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process in LV.2. S1025). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.2 (see FIGS. 86 to 97) is referred to, and EX points are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

When S1012 and S1024 are NO determination, or after the processing of S1025, the sub CPU 81 performs the specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in LV.2 and 4 (S1026). The details of the specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV. 2 and 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 221 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1027). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1027 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1027 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1038 described later.

On the other hand, in S1027, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1027 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a winning in MICHI (BB5) (S1028). In S1028, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1028 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1038 described later.

On the other hand, in S1028, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (when the determination in S1028 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional special type lottery process at the time of a PTR win (S1029). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1029 in the sub RAM 83 (S1030).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of PTR stocks is 1 (S1031). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1031 that the number of PTR stocks is not 1 (when the determination in S1031 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1038 described later.

On the other hand, in S1031, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of PTR stocks is 1 (when the determination in S1031 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1032). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. That is, in S1032, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1032 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1033).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1034). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1035). In S1035, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1035 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1038 described later.

On the other hand, in S1035, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1035 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1036). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1036 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1037). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S1027, S1028, S1031, and S1035 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1037, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1038). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1038 that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1038 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

On the other hand, in S1038, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1038 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1039). In S1039, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1039 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.2 middle processing.

In S1039, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1039 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (S1040). ). In S1040, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S1040 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

In S1040, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S1040 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is ON (S1041).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1041 that the MICHI flag is ON (when the determination in S1041 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub game state and is preparing for ART. The flag is turned off (S1042). After the processing of S1042, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

On the other hand, in S1041, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is not ON (when the determination in S1041 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of PTR stocks is 1 or more (S1043).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1043 that the number of PTR stocks is 1 or more (when the determination in S1043 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization migration process described with reference to FIG. 217 (S1044). .. After the processing of S1044, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

On the other hand, in S1043, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of PTR stocks is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1043 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more. (S1045).

In S1045, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S1045 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1046). After the processing of S1046, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

On the other hand, in S1045, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1045 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the LV.2 loop flag is OFF. Determine (S1047).

In S1047, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the LV.2 loop flag is OFF (when the determination in S1047 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.1 of R_ART in the next sub game state and prepares for ART. Turn off the middle flag (S1048). After the processing of S1048, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

On the other hand, in S1047, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the LV.2 loop flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1047 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter and the number of specific lip navigation conversions. Is cleared (S1049).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.2 loop lottery process (S1050). In this process, the LV.2 loop lottery table (see FIG. 114) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the LV.2 loop is determined by lottery based on the type of the LV.2 loop rate. In this process, when the winning of the LV.2 loop is determined, the LV.2 loop flag is turned ON. After the processing of S1050, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

[LV.2,4 middle specific navigation conversion lottery processing]
Next, the specific navigation conversion lottery process in LV.2, 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 221.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is LV.2 of R_ART (S1061). In S1061, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not LV.2 of R_ART (when the determination in S1061 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1068 described later.

On the other hand, in S1061, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV.2 of R_ART (when the determination in S1061 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the specific lip navigation conversion number is 2. Is determined (S1062). In S1062, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of specific lip navigation conversions is 2 (when the determination in S1062 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1068 described later.

In S1062, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of specific lip navigation conversions is not 2 (when the determination in S1062 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of specific lip navigation conversions is 0 (S1063). In S1063, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of specific lip navigation conversions is 0 (when the determination in S1063 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1066 described later.

On the other hand, in S1063, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of specific lip navigation conversions is not 0 (when the determination in S1063 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more. (S1064). In S1064, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1064 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1068 described later.

In S1064, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S1064 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a conversion process (S1065). The details of the conversion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 222 described later. After the process of S1065, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1068 described later.

When the determination in S1063 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the LV.2 loop flag is ON or the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (S1066). In S1066, when it is determined that the LV.2 loop flag is ON or the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1066 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1068 described later.

On the other hand, in S1066, when it is determined that the LV.2 loop flag is ON or the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S1066 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs conversion processing (S1067). ).

When S1061, S1064, and S1066 are NO determinations, and S1062 is YES determination, after the processing of S1065 and S1067, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub-game state is LV.4 of R_ART (S1068). ). In S1068, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not LV.4 of R_ART (when the determination in S1068 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific navigation conversion lottery process in LV.2,4. ..

On the other hand, in S1068, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV.4 of R_ART (when the determination in S1068 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the specific lip navigation conversion number is 1. Is determined (S1069). In S1069, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of specific lip navigation conversions is 1 (when the determination in S1069 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific navigation conversion lottery process in LV.2,4.

In S1069, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of specific lip navigation conversions is not 1 (when the determination in S1069 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of PTR stocks is 0 (S1070). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1070 that the number of PTR stocks is 0 (when the determination in S1070 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the specific navigation conversion lottery process in LV.2,4.

On the other hand, in S1070, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of PTR stocks is not 0 (when the determination in S1070 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a conversion process (S1071). After the process of S1071, the sub CPU 81 ends the specific navigation conversion lottery process in LV.2,4.

[Conversion process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the conversion process performed in the specific navigation conversion lottery process in LV.2, 4 will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1081). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1081 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1081 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion process.

On the other hand, in S1081, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1081 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not MICHI is running up (S1082). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1082 that the MICHI is running up (when the determination in S1082 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion process.

On the other hand, in S1082, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 is not running up to MICHI (when the determination in S1082 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is changed to the winning numbers "14" to "24" by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167). It is determined whether or not the prize has been won (S1083). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1083 that the winning numbers "14" to "24" have not been won (when the determination in S1083 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion process.

In S1083, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers "14" to "24" have been won (when the determination in S1083 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a specific lip navigation conversion lottery process during ART (S1084). In this process, the specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART (see FIG. 157 or FIG. 158) is referred to, and based on the number of games of R_ART, whether or not the specific lip navigation is converted is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S1084 is converted (S1085). In S1085, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S1084 does not have conversion (when the determination in S1085 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S1084 has conversion (when the determination in S1085 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific lip navigation conversion flag and adds 1 to the specific lip navigation conversion count counter. (S1086). After the process of S1086, the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion process.

[LV.3 intermediate processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 to 225, the processing during LV.1 performed when the start lever is operated during LV.1 of R_ART will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the processes of S1101 to S1126 in the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 223 and 224. The processing of S1101 to S1126 in the LV.3 intermediate processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S901 to S926 in the flowchart of the LV.1 intermediate processing of the above embodiment shown in FIGS. 212 and 213. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1101 to S1126 will be omitted here.

In S1126, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (when the determination in S1126 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process in LV.1,3,4. Do (S1127). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.3 (see FIGS. 80 to 82) is referred to, and EX points are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the processes of S1128 to S1143 in the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 224 and 225. The processing of S1128 to S1143 in the LV.3 intermediate processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S928 to S943 in the flowchart of the LV.1 intermediate processing of the above embodiment shown in FIGS. 213 and 214. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1128 to S1143 will be omitted here.

In S1143, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is ON (when the determination in S1143 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.4 of R_ART as the next sub game state and is preparing for ART. The flag is turned off (S1144). After the processing of S1144, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.3.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the processes of S1145 to S1147 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 225. The processing of S1145 to S1147 in the LV.3 intermediate processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S945 to S947 in the flowchart of the LV.1 intermediate processing of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 214. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1145 to S1147 will be omitted here.

In S1147, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S1147 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.4 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1148). After the processing of S1148, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.3.

On the other hand, in S1147, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1147 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the next sub-game state in LV.2 of R_ART. Set and turn off the ART preparation flag (S1149). After the processing of S1149, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.3.

[Processing during LV.4]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 228, the processing during LV.4 performed when the start lever is operated during LV.4 of R_ART will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the processes of S1201 to S1211 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 226. The processing of S1201 to S1211 in the LV.4 intermediate processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S1001 to S1011 in the flowchart of the LV.2 intermediate processing of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 218. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1201 to S1211 will be omitted here.

When the determination in S1209 is NO, or after the processing in S2011, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S1212). In S1212, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 0 (when the determination in S1212 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1224 (see FIG. 227) described later.

In S1212, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 0 (when the determination in S1212 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during ART is less than 100 (S1213). ). In S1213, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during ART is not less than 100 (when the determination in S1213 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1224 (see FIG. 227) described later.

On the other hand, in S1213, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during ART is less than 100 (when the determination in S1213 is YES), the sub CPU 81 draws EX points in LV.1, 3, and 4. The process is performed (S1214). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.4 (see FIGS. 83 to 85) is referred to, and EX points are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during ART is 100 or more (S1215). In S1215, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1215 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1224 (see FIG. 227) described later.

On the other hand, in S1215, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S1215 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process when the PTR is won. (S1216). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1216 in the sub RAM 83 (S1217).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1218). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. That is, in S1218, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1218 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1219).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1220). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1221). In S1221, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1221 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1224 described later.

On the other hand, in S1221, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1221 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1222). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1222 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1223). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S1212, S1213, S1215, and S1221 are determined to be NO, or after the processing of S1223, the sub CPU 81 performs the specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in LV.2 and 4 described with reference to FIG. 221 (S1224).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1225). In S1225, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1225 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1236 described later.

On the other hand, in S1225, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1225 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a winning in MICHI (BB5) (S1226). In S1226, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1226 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1236 described later.

On the other hand, in S1226, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a winning (when the determination in S1226 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR (S1227). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1227 in the sub RAM 83 (S1228).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of PTR stocks is 1 (S1229). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1229 that the number of PTR stocks is not 1 (when the determination in S1229 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1236 described later.

On the other hand, in S1229, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of PTR stocks is 1 (when the determination in S1229 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1230). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. That is, in S1230, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1230 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1231).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1232). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1233). In S1233, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1233 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1236 described later.

On the other hand, in S1233, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1233 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1234). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1234 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1235). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S1225, S1226, S1229, and S1233 are determined to be NO, or after the processing of S1235, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1236). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1236 that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1236 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.4 middle processing.

On the other hand, in S1236, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1236 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1237). In S1237, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1237 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.4 middle processing.

In S1237, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1237 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (S1238). ). In S1238, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S1238 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.4.

In S1238, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S1238 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 1 or more (S1239). ..

In S1239, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 1 or more (when the determination in S1239 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization migration process described with reference to FIG. 217 (S1240). After the processing of S1240, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.4.

On the other hand, in S1239, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1239 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100. (S1241).

In S1241, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (when the determination in S1241 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub game state. , The ART preparation flag is turned off (S1242). After the processing of S1242, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.4.

On the other hand, in S1241, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not less than 100 (when the determination in S1241 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR (S1243). ). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1243 in the sub RAM 83 (S1244). Then, the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization transition process described with reference to FIG. 217 (S1245).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1246). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1246 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1247). Then, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1248). After the processing of S1248, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.4.

[LV.5 intermediate processing]
Next, LV.5 intermediate processing performed when the start lever is operated during LV.5 (PTR) of R_ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a PTR stock loop lottery process (S1301). The details of the PTR stock loop lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 232 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is ON (S1302). In S1302, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not ON (when the determination in S1302 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1305 described later.

On the other hand, in S1302, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is ON (when the determination in S1302 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. (S1303). In S1303, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S1303 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1305 described later.

In S1303, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S1303 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S1304).

When S1302 is NO determination and S1303 is YES determination, after the processing of S1304, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1305). In S1305, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1305 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1315 described later.

On the other hand, in S1305, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1305 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has a value of 1 or more in the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART. Whether or not it is determined (S1306).

In S1306, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART is 1 or more (when the determination in S1306 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART. The value is subtracted by 1 (S1307).

When the determination in S1306 is NO, or after the processing in S1307, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of precursor is B_RUSH precursor (S1308). In S1308, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is not in the B_RUSH precursor (when the determination in S1308 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1311 described later.

On the other hand, in S1308, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is B_RUSH precursor (when the determination in S1308 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is 1 or more. Determine (S1309). In S1309, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the precursor game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S1309 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the precursor game number counter (S1310).

When the determination in S1308 and S1309 is NO, after the processing in S1310, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of precursor is B_RUSH precursor (S1311). In S1311, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is B_RUSH precursor (when the determination in S1311 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1315 described later.

On the other hand, in S1311, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is not in the B_RUSH precursor (when the determination in S1311 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of B_RUSH stocks is 1 or more (S1312). ). In S1312, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of B_RUSH stocks is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1312 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1315 described later.

In S1312, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of B_RUSH stocks is 1 or more (when the determination in S1312 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery process (S1313). In this process, the number of precursor games is determined by lottery based on the number of remaining games of LV.5 (PTR) with reference to the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table (see FIGS. 138 and 139).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets B_RUSH precursor in the precursor type (S1314).

When S1305 and S1312 are determined to be NO, when S1311 is determined to be YES, or after the processing of S1314, the sub CPU 81 performs an EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S1315). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103) is referred to, and the EX points for B_RUSH are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the determined EX point for B_RUSH is added to the EX point counter for B_RUSH.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1316). In S1316, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1316 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1323 described later.

On the other hand, in S1316, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1316 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1317). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1317 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1318). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1319). In S1319, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1319 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1323 described later.

On the other hand, in S1319, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1319 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of precursor is non-precursor (when the determination is YES). S1320). In S1320, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is not non-precursor (when the determination in S1320 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1323 described later.

In S1320, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is non-precursor (when the determination in S1320 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery process (S1321). In this process, the number of precursor games is determined by lottery based on the number of remaining games of LV.5 (PTR) with reference to the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table (see FIGS. 138 and 139).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets B_RUSH precursor in the precursor type (S1322).

When S1316, S1319, and S1320 are determined to be NO, or after the processing of S1322, the sub CPU 81 performs the specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing in LV.1, 3, and 5 described with reference to FIG. 216 (1323).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (1324). In S1324, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1324 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1328 described later.

On the other hand, in 1324, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1324 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a winning in MICHI (BB5) (S1325). In S1325, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1325 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1328 described later.

In S1325, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (when the determination in S1325 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of a PTR win (S1326). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1326 in the sub RAM 83 (S1327).

When the determination in S1324 and S1325 is NO, or after the processing in S1327, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1328). In S1328, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1328 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1331 described later.

On the other hand, in S1328, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1328 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1329). In S1329, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1329 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.5 intermediate processing.

In S1329, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1329 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S1330). .. After the processing of S1330, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

When the determination in S1328 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1331). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1331 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1331 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.5 intermediate processing.

On the other hand, in S1331, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1331 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of precursor is B_RUSH precursor (when the determination is YES). S1332). In S1332, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of precursor is B_RUSH precursor (when the determination in S1332 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1338 described later.

In S1332, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the precursor is not in the B_RUSH precursor (when the determination in S1332 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART is 0. Is determined (S1333). In S1333, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART is not 0 (when the determination in S1333 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

On the other hand, in S1333, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART is 0 (when the determination in S1333 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is PTR stock. (S1334).

In S1334, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no PTR stock (when the determination in S1334 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.4 of R_ART as the next sub game state and turns off the ART preparation flag. (S1335). Further, in this process, the EX point counter for B_RUSH is initialized. That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0. After the processing of S1335, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1334 that there is PTR stock (when the determination in S1334 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization transition process described with reference to FIG. 217 (S1336).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1337). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source. After the processing of S1337, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

When the determination in S1332 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is 0 (S1338). In S1338, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S1338 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

On the other hand, in S1338, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S1338 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets B_RUSH as the next sub game state, and the LV of R_ART. .5 Add 1 to the value of the remaining game counter (S1339). After the processing of S1339, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

[PTR stock loop lottery processing]
Next, the PTR stock loop lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 232.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of PTR loop stocks is 1 or more (S1351). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1351 that the number of PTR loop stocks is not 1 or more (NO in S1351), the sub CPU 81 ends the PTR stock loop lottery process.

On the other hand, in S1351, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of PTR loop stocks is 1 or more (when the determination in S1351 is YES), the sub CPU 81 extracts the loop ratio at the beginning of the PTR loop stock (S1352).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a PTR stock lottery process during RTG (S1353). In this process, the PTR stock lottery table in RTG (see FIG. 150) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is determined by lottery based on the type of the PTR loop rate.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock has been won in S1353 (S1354). In S1354, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not a win (when the determination in S1354 is NO), the sub CPU 81 deletes the head of the PTR loop stock (S1355). After the process of S1355, the sub CPU 81 ends the PTR stock loop lottery process.

In this embodiment, the processes from S1351 to S1355 are repeated for the upper limit value of the PTR loop stock (set to 32 in this embodiment).

In S1354, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is a winning (when the determination in S1354 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR (S1356). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1356 in the sub RAM 83 (S1357). After the process of S1357, the sub CPU 81 ends the PTR stock loop lottery process.

[Processing in preparation for specialization]
Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the special preparation processing performed when the start lever is operated during the special preparation will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 232 (S1361).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (S1362). In S1362, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S1362 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the specialization preparation preparation flag (S1363).

In S1362, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (when the determination in S1362 is YES), or after the processing of S1363, the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S1364). ). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103) is referred to, and the EX points for B_RUSH are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the determined EX point for B_RUSH is added to the EX point counter for B_RUSH.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1365). In S1365, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1365 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1368 described later.

On the other hand, in S1365, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1365 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1366). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1366 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1637). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S1365 is NO, or after the processing in S1637, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1368). In S1368, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1368 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1372 described later.

On the other hand, in S1368, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1368 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a winning in MICHI (BB5) (S1369). In S1369, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1369 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1372 described later.

On the other hand, in S1369, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a winning (when the determination in S1369 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR (S1370). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1370 in the sub RAM 83 (S1371).

When the determination in S1368 and S1369 is NO, or after the processing in S1371, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (S1372). In S1372, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S1372 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1376 described later.

On the other hand, in S1372, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S1372 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the specialization preparation preparation flag is OFF. (S1373). In S1373, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specialization preparation preparation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1373 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization preparation preparation process.

In S1373, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specialization preparation preparation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1373 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT4 transition replay has been won (S1374). In S1374, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 transition replay is not a win (when the determination in S1374 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization preparation process.

On the other hand, in S1374, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 transition replay is a win (when the determination in S1374 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process with reference to FIG. 193 (S1375). After the process of S1375, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during preparation for specialization.

When the determination in S1372 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process with reference to FIG. 193 (S1375). After the process of S1375, the sub CPU 81 ends the process during preparation for specialization.

[Processing during PREMIUM]
Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the processing during PREMIUM performed when the start lever is operated during “PREMIUM” in LV.5 (PTR) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1381).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 1 or more (S1382). In S1382, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S1382 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the special guarantee game number counter (when the determination is YES). S1383).

In S1382, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1382 is NO), or after the processing of S1383, the sub CPU 81 performs the additional lottery processing in PREMIUM ( S1384). In this process, the additional winning or non-winning is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the additional lottery table in PREMIUM (see FIG. 119).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the addition was won in S1384 (S1385). In S1385, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition has not been won (when the determination in S1385 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1388 described later.

On the other hand, in S1385, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition has been won (when the determination in S1385 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the addition game number lottery process in PREMIUM (S1386). In this process, the number of additional games is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the table for the number of additional games in PREMIUM (see FIGS. 120 and 121).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games determined in S1386 to the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S1387).

When the determination in S1385 is NO, or after the processing in S1387, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1388). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1388 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1388 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1393 described later.

On the other hand, in S1388, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1388 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the special guarantee game number counter (S1389).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a win (S1390). In S1390, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1390 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1393 described later.

On the other hand, in S1390, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (when the determination in S1390 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of a PTR win (S1391). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1391 in the sub RAM 83 (S1392).

When the determination in S1388 and S1390 is NO, or after the processing in S1392, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 0 (S1393). In S1393, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S1393 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the PREMIUM process.

On the other hand, in S1393, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S1393 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is in LV.5 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1394). After the processing of S1394, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during PREMIUM.

[Processing during FIGHTING]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, the process during FIG. TING performed when the start lever is operated during "FIGHTING" in LV.5 (PTR) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 turns off the FIGHTING continuation flag (S1401). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1402).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 0 (S1403). In S1403, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S1403 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1409 described later.

On the other hand, in S1403, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S1403 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns on the guarantee flag (S1404). Then, the sub CPU 81 turns on the FIGHTING continuation flag (S1405).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1406). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1406 that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1406 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1416 described later.

On the other hand, in S1406, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1406 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning combination is the guaranteed number subtraction target combination (S1407). As the guaranteed number subtraction target combination, for example, replay without RT transition can be mentioned.

In S1407, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the guaranteed number of subtraction target combination is not a winning combination (when the determination in S1407 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1416 described later.

On the other hand, in S1407, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning combination for the guaranteed number of times subtraction is a winning combination (when the determination in S1407 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the special guarantee game number counter (S1408). .. After the processing of S1408, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1416 described later.

When the determination in S1403 is YES, the sub CPU 81 turns off the guarantee flag (S1409). Then, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning combination is an RT4 special replay (S1410).

In S1410, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning combination is the RT4 special replay (when the determination in S1410 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1413 described later.

On the other hand, in S1410, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning combination is not the RT4 special replay (when the determination in S1410 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning combination is the BB winning combination or the forced termination winning combination. (S1411). In S1411, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB win or the forced termination winning combination is a win (when the determination in S1411 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1416 described later.

In S1411, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB winning or the forced termination winning combination is not a winning (when the determination in S1411 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns on the FIGHTING continuation flag (S1412). After the processing of S1412, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1416 described later.

When the determination in S1410 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs a continuous lottery process during FIGHTING (S1413). In this process, the continuation lottery table during FIGHTING (see FIG. 124) is referred to, and the continuation or the end is determined by lottery based on the type of FIGHT loop rate.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S1413 is continuous (S1414). In S1414, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S1413 is not continuous (when the determination in S1414 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1416 described later.

On the other hand, in S1414, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S1413 is continuous (when the determination in S1414 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the FIGHTING continuation flag (S1415).

When S1406 and S1411 are determined to be YES, when S1407 and S1414 are determined to be NO, or after the processing of S1408, S1412 and S1415, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the guarantee flag is OFF and the RT4 special lip is won. (S1416). In S1416, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the guarantee flag is OFF and the RT4 special lip is won (when the determination in S1416 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1422 described later.

On the other hand, in S1416, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the guarantee flag is OFF and does not win the RT4 special lip (when the determination in S1416 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the FIGHTING continuation flag is ON. (S1417). In S1417, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the FIGHTING continuation flag is not ON (when the determination in S1416 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1422 described later.

In S1417, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the FIGHTING continuation flag is ON (when the determination in S1416 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional lottery process during FIGHTING (S1418). In this process, the additional winning or non-winning is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the additional lottery table in FIGHTING (see FIGS. 125 to 129).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the addition is won in S1418 (S1419). In S1419, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition has not been won (when the determination in S1419 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1422 described later.

On the other hand, in S1419, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition has been won (when the determination in S1419 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the addition game number lottery process during FIGHTING (S1420). In this process, the number of additional games is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the FIGHTING middle-addition game number lottery table (see FIGS. 130 to 132).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games determined in S1420 to the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S1421).

When S1416 is a YES determination, S1417 and S1419 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1421, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1422). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1422 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1422 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1427 described later.

On the other hand, in S1422, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1422 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the special guarantee game number counter (S1423).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a win (S1424). In S1424, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1424 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1427 described later.

On the other hand, in S1424, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (when the determination in S1424 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of a PTR win (S1425). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1425 in the sub RAM 83 (S1426).

When the determination in S1422 and S1424 is NO, or after the processing in S1426, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the FIGHTING continuation flag is OFF (S1427). In S1427, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the FIGHTING continuation flag is not OFF (when the determination in S1427 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the FIGHTING process.

On the other hand, in S1427, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the FIGHTING continuation flag is OFF (when the determination in S1427 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART as the next sub game state and prepares for ART. The middle flag is turned off (S1428). After the processing of S1428, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during FIGHTING.

[Processing during BURNING]
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the process during BURNING performed when the start lever is operated during "BURNING" in LV.5 (PTR) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1441).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 1 or more (S1442). In S1442, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S1442 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the special guarantee game number counter (when the determination is YES). S1443).

In S1442, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1442 is NO), or after the processing of S1443, the sub CPU 81 performs the additional lottery processing in BURNING ( S1444). In this process, the additional winning or non-winning is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the additional lottery table in BURNING (see FIG. 133).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the addition was won in S1444 (S1445). In S1445, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition has not been won (when the determination in S1445 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1448 described later.

On the other hand, in S1445, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition has been won (when the determination in S1445 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional game number lottery process in BURNING (S1446). In this process, the number of additional games is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the table for the number of additional games in BURNING (see FIGS. 134 to 136).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games determined in S1446 to the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S1447).

When the determination in S1445 is NO, or after the processing in S1447, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1448). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1448 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1448 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1453 described later.

On the other hand, in S1448, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1448 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the special guarantee game number counter (S1449).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a win (S1450). In S1450, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1450 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1453 described later.

On the other hand, in S1450, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a winning (when the determination in S1450 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR (S1451). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1451 in the sub RAM 83 (S1452).

When the determination in S1448 and S1450 is NO, or after the processing in S1452, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 0 (S1453). In S1453, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S1453 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the BURNING process.

On the other hand, in S1453, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S1453 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is in LV.5 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1454). After the processing of S1454, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during BURNING.

[Processing during B_RUSH]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 and 239, the processing during B_RUSH performed when the start lever is operated during "B_RUSH" in LV.5 (PTR) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1471).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is 1 or more (S1472). In S1472, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S1472 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the B_RUSH game number counter (S1473).

In S1472, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1472 is NO), or after the processing of S1473, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR addition lottery processing in B_RUSH (S1474). ). In this process, the PTR addition lottery table in B_RUSH (see FIG. 140) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR addition is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR addition is won in S1474 (S1475). In S1475, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR addition has not been won (when the determination in S1475 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1478 described later.

On the other hand, in S1475, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR addition has been won (when the determination in S1475 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR addition specialization type lottery process (S1476). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1476 in the sub RAM 83 (S1478).

When the determination in S1475 is NO, or after the processing in S1478, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1479). In S1479, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1479 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1483 described later.

On the other hand, in S1479, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1479 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a winning in MICHI (BB5) (S1480). In S1480, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1480 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1483 described later.

On the other hand, in S1480, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is the winning (when the determination in S1480 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization type lottery processing at the time of the PTR winning (S1481). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1481 in the sub RAM 83 (S1482).

When S1479 and S1480 are NO determination, or after the processing of S1482, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1483). In S1483, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1483 is YES), the sub CPU 81 inserts the current loop rate at the beginning of the B_RUSH stock (S1484). After the processing of S1484, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during B_RUSH.

On the other hand, in S1483, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1483 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is 0 (S1485). In S1485, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S1484 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during B_RUSH.

In S1485, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S1484 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH continuous lottery process (S1486). In this process, the continuation or end of B_RUSH is determined by lottery with reference to the B_RUSH continuous lottery table (see FIG. 146) based on the type of BR loop rate.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the B_RUSH continuation is won in S1486 (S1487). In S1487, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the B_RUSH continuation has not been won (when the determination in S1487 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART as the next sub game state and is preparing for ART. The flag is turned off (S1488). After the processing of S1488, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during B_RUSH.

On the other hand, in S1487, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the B_RUSH continuation has been won (when the determination in S1487 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets "3" in the B_RUSH game number counter (S1489). After the processing of S1489, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during B_RUSH.

[Processing during RTG]
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the RTG processing performed when the start lever is operated during the “RTG” will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1501).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 1 or more (S1502). In S1502, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S1502 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the special guarantee game number counter (when the determination is YES). S1503).

In S1502, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1502 is NO), or after the processing of S1503, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery processing during RTG. (S1504). In this process, the PTR stock lottery table in RTG (see FIG. 150) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is determined by lottery based on the type of the PTR loop rate.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 1 or more (S1505). In S1505, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (when the determination in S1505 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1509 described later.

On the other hand, in S1505, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is 1 or more (when the determination in S1505 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result of S1504 to the PTR loop stock (S1506).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR (S1507). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1507 in the sub RAM 83 (S1508).

When the determination in S1505 is NO, or after the processing in S1508, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1509). In S1509, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1509 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S15141 described later.

On the other hand, in S1509, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1509 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the special guarantee game number counter (S1510).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a win (S1511). In S1511, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1511 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1514 described later.

On the other hand, in S1511, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a winning (when the determination in S1511 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR (S1512). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1512 in the sub RAM 83 (S1513).

When the determination in S1509 and S1511 is NO, or after the processing in S1513, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 0 (S1514). In S1514, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S1514 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the RTG processing.

On the other hand, in S1514, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is 0 (when the determination in S1514 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Set and turn off the ART preparation flag (S1515). After the processing of S1515, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during RTG.

[Processing waiting for ART end]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 241 and 242, the ART end waiting process performed when the start lever is operated during the end waiting of R_ART will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 turns off the RTG winning flag (S1521). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT4 transition replay has been won (S1522). In S1522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 transition replay has not been won (when the determination in S1522 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1526 described later.

On the other hand, in S1522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 transition replay has been won (when the determination in S1522 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the RTG transition lottery process (S1523). In this process, the RTG transition lottery table (see FIG. 147) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the RTG transition is determined by lottery based on the number of BBs.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RTG transition has been won in S1523 (S1524). In S1524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RTG transition has not been won (when the determination in S1524 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1525 described later.

On the other hand, in S1524, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RTG transition has been won (when the determination in S1524 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the RTG winning flag (S1525).

When S1522 and S1524 are NO determination, or after the processing of S1525, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the batting order bell is a win (S1526). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning numbers are "42" to "53".

In S1526, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the batting order bell is a win (when the determination in S1526 is YES), the sub CPU 81 temporarily sets the next sub-game state to the normal state (S1527).

In S1526, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the batting order bell is not a win (when the determination in S1526 is NO), or after the processing of S1527, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the batting order bell is a win (S1528). .. In S1528, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the batting order bell is a win (when the determination in S1528 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1535 described later.

On the other hand, in S1528, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the batting order bell is not a winning game (when the determination in S1528 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1529). In S1529, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1529 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1535 described later.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1529 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1529 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs an EX point acquisition lottery process in LV.1, 3 and 4 (S1530). In this process, the EX point acquisition lottery table in LV.3 (see FIGS. 80 to 82) is referred to, and EX points are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (S1531). In S1531, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1531 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1535 (see FIG. 242) described later.

On the other hand, in S1531, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (when the determination in S1531 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the LV.1 of R_ART in the next sub game state. Set (S1532).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1533). In this process, the EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and EX points are determined by lottery based on the level of the transfer destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the EX points acquired in S1533 in the corresponding EX point counter (S1534).

When S1528 and S1529 are determined to be YES, when S1531 is determined to be NO, or after the processing of S1534, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1535). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1535 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1535 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART end waiting process.

On the other hand, in S1535, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1535 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a winning in MICHI (BB5) (S1536). In S1536, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1536 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1545 described later.

On the other hand, in S1536, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a winning (when the determination in S1536 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional specialization type lottery process at the time of winning the PTR (S1537). In this process, the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of winning the PTR (see FIG. 118) is referred to, and the additional specialization type is determined by lottery based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1537 in the sub RAM 83 (S1538).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1539). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. In S1539, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1539 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1540).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1541). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1542). In S1542, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1542 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1545 described later.

On the other hand, in S1542, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1542 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1543). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1543 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1544). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S1536 and S1542 are determined to be NO, or after the processing of S1544, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not MICHI (BB5) is a win (S1545). In S1545, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1545 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART end waiting process.

On the other hand, in S1545, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (when the determination in S1545 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.1 of R_ART in the next sub game state (S1546). ).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1547). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. In S1547, the EX point during R_ART is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the EX points in R_ART acquired in S1547 to the EX point counter in R_ART (S1548). After the process of S1548, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART end waiting process.

[Processing when turning is stopped]
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the processing when the rotating cylinder is stopped will be described. This reel stop processing is performed when the sub-control circuit 42 receives the reel stop command in accordance with S177 described above, and is performed at the first stop or the second stop (the push order is determined at the second stop). Therefore, it is not performed at the time of the third stop). When the sub-control circuit 42 receives the reel stop command in S184 described above, the processing at the time of stopping the reel is not performed.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a push order designation (navigation) (S1581). In S1581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no push order designation (navigation) (when the determination in S1581 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1584 described later.

On the other hand, in S1581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a push order designation (navigation) (when the determination in S1581 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the stopped reel is different from the push order designation (navigation) reel. (S1582). In S1582, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel does not differ (same) as the push order designation (navigation) reel (when the determination in S1581 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1584 described later. Do.

In S1582, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is different from the push order designation (navigation) reel (when the determination in S1582 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the navigation press error flag (S1583).

When S1581 and S1582 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1583, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub-game state is preparing for specialization (S1584). In S1584, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in preparation for specialization (when the determination in S1584 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing when the rotating cylinder is stopped.

On the other hand, in S1584, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is in preparation for specialization (when the determination in S1584 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation press error flag is ON. (S1585). In S1585, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the navigation pressing error flag is not ON (when the determination in S1585 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the rotation stop processing.

In S1585, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the navigation pressing error flag is ON (when the determination in S1585 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S1586). After the processing of S1586, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of stopping the rotation.

[Processing during the third stop operation]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 244 to 246, the processing during the third stop operation performed during the third stop operation will be described. This third stop operation processing is performed when the sub-control circuit 42 receives the display command according to the above-mentioned S305.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB is being carried over (S1601). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1601 that the BB is being carried over (when the determination in S1601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation process.

On the other hand, in S1601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB is not carried over (when the determination in S1601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the sub CPU 81 is in the BB (S1602). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1602 that it is in the BB (when the determination in S1601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation process.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1602 that it is not in the BB (when the determination in S1601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is ON (S1603). In S1603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not ON (when the determination in S1603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1606 described later.

On the other hand, in S1603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is ON (when the determination in S1603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the ART preparation flag is ON). S1604). In S1604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S1604 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1606 described later.

In S1604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S1604 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S1605).

When S1603 is a NO determination, S1604 is a YES determination, or after the processing of S1605, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub-game state is in the normal state (S1606). In S1606, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in the normal state (when the determination in S1604 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1624 (see FIG. 244) described later.

On the other hand, in S1606, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is in the normal state (when the determination in S1604 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a BB winning game (S1607). ). In S1607, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (when the determination in S1607 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1614 described later.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1607 that the game is not a BB winning game (when the determination in S1607 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has RT0 game states, RT1 game states, and RT3 games after the end of the previous game (game). It is determined whether or not it is in any of the states (S1608). In S1608, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state after the end of the previous game (game) is not any of the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the RT3 game state (when the determination in S1608 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines. , The process of S1614 described later is performed.

On the other hand, in S1608, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state after the end of the previous game (game) is any of the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the RT3 game state (when the determination in S1608 is YES). The sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning numbers "14" to "24" have been won by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167) (S1609). In S1609, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers "14" to "24" have not been won (when the determination in S1609 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1612 described later.

In S1609, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers "14" to "24" have been won (when the determination in S1609 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT4 specific replay is a prize (if it is determined). S1610). In S1610, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 specific replay is not a prize (when the determination in S1610 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1612 described later.

On the other hand, in S1610, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 specific replay has won a prize (when the determination in S1610 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets a batting order specific lip as a reference winning combination in the high-accuracy stock lottery process (S1611). ).

When S1609 and S1610 are NO determination, or after the processing of S1611, the sub CPU 81 performs a high-accuracy stock lottery processing (S1612). In this process, the high-accuracy stock lottery table (see FIG. 63) is referred to, and the number of high-accuracy stocks is determined by lottery based on the reference winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result (determined high probability stock number) of S1612 to the value of the direct hit ART high probability stock number counter (S1613).

If S1607 is a YES determination, S1608 is a NO determination, or after the processing of S1613, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT4 transition replay is a prize (S1614). In S1614, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 transition replay is not a prize (when the determination in S1614 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1624 described later.

On the other hand, in S1614, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 transition replay is a prize (when the determination in S1614 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the RTG to the PTR stock and sets the RTG in the next sub game state. (S1615).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an ART grade lottery process (S1616). In this process, the ART grade lottery table (see FIGS. 71 to 73) is referred to, and the ART grade type is determined by lottery based on the mode type. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result (determined grade type) of S1616 to the ART grade (S1617).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1618). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. In S1618, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1618 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1619).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1620). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1621). In S1621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1612 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1624 described later.

On the other hand, in S1621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1621 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1622). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1622 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1623). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is waiting for the end of ART (S1624). In S1624, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not waiting for the end of ART (when the determination in S1624 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1645 (see FIG. 245) described later.

On the other hand, in S1624, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of ART (when the determination in S1624 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the batting order bell is a win. (S1625). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning numbers are "42" to "53". In S1625, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the batting order bell is not a win (when the determination in S1625 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1630 described later.

In S1625, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the batting order bell is a win (when the determination in S1625 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of medals to be paid out is nine (S1626). In S1626, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of medals to be paid out is not nine (when the determination in S1626 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1630 described later.

On the other hand, in S1626, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of medals to be paid out is 9 (when the determination in S1626 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has an RT gaming state at the time of lever operation and an RT gaming state before winning. It is determined whether or not they are the same (S1627).

In S1627, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state at the time of lever operation and the RT game state before winning are the same (when the determination in S1627 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends ART in the next sub game state. Standing is set (S1628). After the processing of S1628, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1630 described later.

On the other hand, in S1627, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state at the time of lever operation and the RT game state before winning are not the same (when the determination in S1627 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is normally set to the next sub game state. The state is set (S1629).

The RT does not transition between the operation of the start lever 16 and the winning of the RT transition. Therefore, it is usually impossible for S1627 to be judged as NO. That is, when S1627 is determined to be NO, it is considered that either a fraudulent act has been performed or some abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the normal state (initial state set when the setting is changed), which has the lowest degree of advantage for the player, is set. In this embodiment, ART may be started again (so-called pullback is generated) while waiting for the end of ART, and the probability of winning ART is higher than in the normal state.

When the determination in S1625 and S1626 is NO, or after the processing in S1628 and S1629, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RTG transition flag is ON and the RT4 transition replay is a prize (S1630). In S1630, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RTG transition flag is ON and the RT4 transition replay is not a prize (when the determination in S1630 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1638 (see FIG. 245) described later. ..

On the other hand, in S1630, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RTG transition flag is ON and the RT4 transition replay is a prize (when the determination in S1630 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds the RTG to the PTR stock, and the next time. RTG is set to the sub-game state of (S1631).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point lottery process at the time of level transition (S1632). In this process, the initial EX point lottery table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX point is determined by lottery based on the type of the transfer destination level. In S1632, the EX point for B_RUSH is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1632 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1633).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1634). In this process, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is determined by lottery based on the type of the migration source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1635). In S1635, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (when the determination in S1635 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1638 described later.

On the other hand, in S1635, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (when the determination in S1635 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1636). In this process, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of BR loop rate is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1636 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1637). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is the normal state (S1638). In S1638, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not the normal state (when the determination in S1638 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1645 described later.

On the other hand, in S1638, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is the normal state (when the determination in S1638 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the direct hit ART flag is ON (when the determination is YES in S1638). S1639). In S1639, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the direct hit ART flag is not ON (when the determination in S1639 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1645 described later.

In S1639, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the direct hit ART flag is ON (when the determination in S1639 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns off the direct hit ART flag and sets the direct hit ART winning grade to the ART grade. (S1640).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets LV.3 of R_ART in the next sub-game state, and clears the number of shifts to LV.3 of R_ART (S1641).

Next, when the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S1642) in S1642, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S1642). Is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the ART preparation flag (S1643). After the processing of S1643, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1645 described later.

On the other hand, in S1642, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (when the determination in S1642 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S1644).

When S1624, S1638, and S1639 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1644, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub-game state is in "FIGHTING" (S1645). In S1645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in "FIGHTING" (when the determination in S1645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation process.

On the other hand, in S1645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub-game state is in FIGHTING (when the determination in S1645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the continuation flag during FIGHTING is OFF. (S1646). In S1646, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the continuation flag during FIGHTING is not OFF (when the determination in S1646 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation process.

In S1646, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the continuation flag during FIGHTING is OFF (when the determination in S1646 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT3 transition replay is a prize (S1647).

In S1647, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT3 transition replay is a prize (when the determination in S1647 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART in the next sub game state (S1648). After the processing of S1648, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of the third stop operation.

On the other hand, in S1647, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT3 transition replay is not a prize (when the determination in S1647 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the RT3 transition replay is determined to be NO). S1649).

In S1649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S1649 is NO), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART for the next sub gaming state (S1650). ). After the processing of S1650, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of the third stop operation.

On the other hand, in S1649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S1649 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets FIGHTING for the next sub gaming state (S1651). .. After the processing of S1651, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of the third stop operation.

[Processing during game lock]
Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the game lock processing performed when the sub control unit (sub control circuit 42) receives the game lock command during the game lock will be described.
In the present embodiment, when there is no command data to be transmitted, the non-operation command data is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S1671). In S1671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S1671 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the game lock processing.

On the other hand, in S1671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S1671 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a combo occurrence during PREMIUM. (S1672). In S1672, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game does not generate a combo during PREMIUM (when the determination in S1672 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the game lock processing.

In S1672, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a combo occurrence during PREMIUM (when the determination in S1672 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is "PREMIUM". (S1673). In S1673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not "PREMIUM" (when the determination in S1673 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the game lock processing.

On the other hand, in S1673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is "PREMIUM" (when the determination in S1673 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an additional game number lottery process at the time of combo during PREMIUM (S1674). ). In this process, the number of additional games at the time of combo during PREMIUM is referred to (see FIG. 122), and the number of additional games is determined by lottery based on the type of reel effect. After the process of S1674, the sub CPU 81 ends the game lock process.

[Processing when changing settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the setting change processing performed when the setting is changed will be described. This setting change processing is performed when the sub-control circuit 42 receives the setting change command in S1 described above.

First, the sub CPU 81 initializes all the variables related to the lottery process by the sub control unit (sub control circuit 42) (S1681). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the number of direct hit ART high probability stocks (S1682).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a specific mode MAP lottery process when the setting is changed (S1683). In this process, the map type is determined by lottery with reference to the specific mode MAP lottery table (see FIG. 58) when the setting is changed. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets "0" in the specific mode MAP access number, and sets the specific mode on the MAP in the next specific mode (S1684).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.4 opponent mode lottery process when the setting is changed (S1685). In this process, the LV.4 opponent mode lottery table (see FIG. 117) at the time of setting change is referred to, and the opponent mode is determined by lottery. After the processing of S1685, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of setting change.

[Explanation of R_ART operation]
In this embodiment, R_ART is composed of a plurality of layers. That is, R_ART is composed of LV.1 to LV.5. Then, each of LV.1 to LV.4 is played for a predetermined period (20 games). On the other hand, the predetermined period (number of games) of LV.5 (PTR) is basically determined in "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING", or "BURNING" performed after the transition to LV.5.

In LV.1 to LV.4 of R_ART, EX points during R_ART are given by lottery at the time of transition and lottery based on the internal winning combination in each game. Then, in LV.1 to LV.4 of R_ART, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the level (hierarchy) is moved to the next higher level. In the present embodiment, it is a predetermined condition that the total of EX points in R_ART is 100 or more.

On the other hand, in LV.1 to LV.4 of R_ART, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the level (hierarchy) is moved to the next lower level. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied in LV.1, R_ART is terminated.

Therefore, when moving to a higher level, at least a predetermined period (20 games) at the moved (up) level and a predetermined period (20 games) at a level one step lower than that level are granted. .. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel that a lot of advantageous benefits have been given to the player, rather than simply giving a predetermined number of games (period). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during R_ART (AT).

In addition, the level does not always go down one step after playing the game for a predetermined period at the level one step up. Therefore, when moving to a higher level, it can be expected to move to two or more levels (level up). As a result, the increase in the period during which R_ART is performed (so-called addition) can be made monotonous, and the interest of the game during R_ART (AT) of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the player can grasp whether the end of R_ART (AT) is near or far for each level (hierarchy), and the end of AT is not expressed by the number of remaining games. It is possible to enhance the effect of expressing. Further, when the end of AT is represented by the number of remaining games, when the number of remaining games exceeds a certain level, the player is less likely to feel the difference. However, as in the present embodiment, by expressing the end of R_ART (AT) in a hierarchy, the difference in the period until the end of R_ART (AT) can be effectively expressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when shifting from CZ (BB1 to BB4) to R_ART, it starts from LV.3 of R_ART. As a result, the R_ART does not end only at the started level (hierarchy), a certain number of medals can be easily obtained by the R_ART, and the player's expectation for the start of the R_ART (AT) can be increased.

Furthermore, by ensuring the expectation that a certain number of medals will be obtained, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered even if the predetermined period of each level is shortened. Further, by shortening the predetermined period of each layer, the number of layers can be increased and the predetermined conditions can be easily satisfied, and the degree of freedom in the development and design of playability in R_ART can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, in LV.2 of R_ART, an LV.2 loop lottery for determining whether or not to repeat LV.2 (same layer) is performed. As a result, in LV.2, it is possible to repeat the same layer even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied. As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player even when the predetermined conditions are often not satisfied.

Further, when shifting from CZ (BB1 to BB4) to R_ART, since it starts from LV.3 of R_ART, LV.2 can always pass by the end of R_ART. As a result, when shifting from CZ (BB1 to BB4) to R_ART, the LV.2 loop lottery can always be performed, discomfort can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the highest hierarchy (LV.5), a specialized zone (“PREMIUM”, “FIGHTING”, or “BURNING” that can prolong the period in which the game is played (increase the number of games) is possible. ") Was provided. As a result, if the player can move to LV.5, which is the highest level, the player can have the expectation that the period during which R_ART is performed can be extended, and the game during R_ART (AT) can be performed. It is hard to be monotonous and can improve the fun of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the transition from MICHI (BB5) to R_ART is performed, the transition from LV.1 of R_ART to LV.5 is determined. As a result, the player's expectation for the winning of MICHI (BB5) can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the transition from MICHI (BB5) to R_ART is performed, the player can experience the flow of transition from LV.1 to LV.5 of R_ART. As a result, even when shifting from CZ (BB1 to BB4) to R_ART, it is possible to be aware of the flow of shifting to LV.5, and it is possible to increase interest in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in R_ART. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, an RTG capable of stocking PTR (LV.5) may be executed when the player shifts to the RT4 gaming state by himself / herself by answering correctly in the pressing order. Then, when the RTG ends, LV.5 of R_ART is started. Therefore, by a method different from the lottery, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it may be possible to shift to the specialized zone, which is an advantageous state for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT3 gaming state in which R_ART is performed to the RT4 gaming state in which RTG is performed. As a result, during the period from the end of R_ART to the transition of the RT gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 (RT0) gaming state, it becomes easy to shift to the RT4 gaming state (RTG) by itself depending on the correct push order. As a result, after the end of R_ART, it can be expected that R_ART will be started again (so-called pullback).

The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including their effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various embodiments and modifications are included as long as the gist of the present invention described in the claims is not deviated.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, each predetermined period of LV.1 to LV.4 is made the same. However, as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period in which each layer is executed may be different. In addition, the conditions for moving up one step from each layer may be different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to go down from the special hierarchy or to make it easy to go up from the special hierarchy.

Further, in the present embodiment, the level (hierarchy) to be started is determined according to the transition trigger (CZ, MICHI, RTG) to R_ART. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have a configuration in which the starting level (layer) in R_ART is determined by lottery.

For example, when the player shifts from CZ (BB1 to BB4) to R_ART and the player selects a lottery, either LV.2 or LV.4 is determined as the level to start R_ART. If the player does not select the lottery, LV.3 may be determined as the level at which R_ART is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, in LV.2 of R_ART, it is determined whether or not the total of EX points has reached the specified value, and if it has not reached the specified value, the LV.2 loop lottery is performed. .. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured to perform LV.2 loop lottery before determining whether or not the total of EX points has reached a specified value.

In this case, the EX points may be carried over. In addition, if the loop lottery is won and the total number of EX points reaches the specified value (satisfying the predetermined conditions), the loop of LV.2 is performed before moving to the next higher level (LV.3). You may go first. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect indicating a state in which it is confirmed that the transition to the next level (LV.3) is performed. Examples of the effect indicating the state in which the transition to the next step is confirmed include a change in BGM and a background screen.

Further, in the present embodiment, the loop rate related to the loop lottery process is preferentially (highly) configured so that the number of continuations of LV.2 is only the first time (see FIG. 112). However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the loop rate for the second and subsequent continuations may be equal to the loop rate for the first continuation. Further, the loop ratios related to the loop lottery process of LV.2 may be unified without being provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the specified number of games (for example, 20 games) is exhausted in the RT2 game state, the RT game state is changed to the RT0 game state. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured so as not to easily shift to the RT3 gaming state. For example, when the specified number of games is exhausted in the RT2 gaming state, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. It may be.

<Summary>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming machine having a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") is known. Then, a game machine that manages the AT function in a set unit is proposed with a plurality of games in which the AT function is executed as one set (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-200497). The gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-200497 is equipped with a so-called addition function that grants one or more sets of ATs when a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the AT function (during AT). doing.

According to such a game machine, the execution of at least one set of AT is guaranteed by satisfying a predetermined condition during AT, so that there is a high possibility that a large number of game media can be acquired. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the number of sets will be added during AT. In addition, by determining the addition of the number of sets during AT, there is a possibility that AT will continue beyond the AT rights granted at the start of AT, and the expectation that AT execution will be decided will be increased. Can be enhanced.

However, in the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-200497, it becomes a simple game property whether or not there is an AT set (AT right), and the game during AT tends to be monotonous. As a result, there was a risk that the interest of the game would decline.

The present invention has been made in order to meet the above demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming during AT.

[ART stage management function]
In the game machine of the present invention, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a plurality of layers (for example, LV.1 to LV.5 of R_ART) in which a game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games), It moves to the next higher level (level), and if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, it moves to the next lower level (level). Then, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the next lower layer (level), R_ART is terminated.

Therefore, when moving to the next higher level (level), at least a predetermined period (20 games) in the moved (up) level and a predetermined period (20 games) in the lower level are granted. It will be. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel that a lot of advantageous benefits have been given to the player, rather than simply giving a predetermined number of games (period). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during R_ART (AT).

Furthermore, the player can grasp whether the end of R_ART (AT) is near or far for each layer, and the effect indicating the end of AT is more than the case where the end of AT is expressed by the number of remaining games. The effect can be enhanced. Further, when the end of AT is represented by the number of remaining games, when the number of remaining games exceeds a certain level, the player is less likely to feel the difference. However, as in the present embodiment, by expressing the end of R_ART (AT) in a hierarchy, the difference in the period until the end of R_ART (AT) can be effectively expressed.

[Intermediate hierarchy start function]
Further, in the present embodiment, when shifting from CZ (BB1 to BB4) to R_ART, it starts from LV.3 of R_ART (a layer other than the lowest layer). As a result, the R_ART does not end only at the starting level, and it becomes easier to obtain a certain number of medals by the R_ART, and the player's expectation for the start of the R_ART (AT) can be increased.

[Same layer loop function]
Further, in the present embodiment, in LV.2 of R_ART, an LV.2 loop lottery for determining whether or not to repeat LV.2 (same layer) is performed. As a result, in LV.2, it is possible to repeat the same layer even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied. As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player even when the predetermined conditions are often not satisfied.

[Top level period extension function]
Further, in the present embodiment, a special zone (“PREMIUM”, “FIGHTING”, or “BURNING”) capable of lengthening the period in which the game is performed is provided at the highest level (LV.5). As a result, if the player can move to the highest level, the player can have the expectation that the period during which R_ART is performed can be extended, and the game during R_ART (AT) is unlikely to become monotonous. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Layer round trip function]
Further, when the transition from MICHI (BB5) to R_ART is performed, the player can experience the flow of transition from the lowest layer (LV.1) to the highest layer (LV.5) of R_ART. As a result, even when shifting from CZ (BB1 to BB4) to R_ART, it is possible to be aware of the flow of shifting to LV.5, and it is possible to increase interest in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in R_ART. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Self-powered high RT function]
Further, in the present embodiment, an RTG capable of stocking PTR (LV.5) may be executed when the player shifts to the RT4 gaming state by himself / herself by answering correctly in the pressing order. Then, when the RTG ends, the highest layer (LV.5) of R_ART is started. Therefore, by a method different from the lottery, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it may be possible to shift to the specialized zone, which is an advantageous state for the player.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... Display window, 11 ... LCD display Device, 16 ... start lever, 17L ... left stop button, 17C ... middle stop button, 17R ... right stop button, 22L, 22R ... production switch, 41 ... main control circuit, 42 ... sub control circuit, 50 ... microcomputer, 51 ... main CPU, 52 ... main ROM, 53 ... main RAM, 56 ... random number generator, 81 ... sub CPU, 82 ... sub ROM, 83 ... sub RAM

Claims (1)

Insertion operation detection means for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium, and
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player based on the detection of a throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means, and
A variable display means composed of a plurality of display columns and variablely displaying a symbol required for a game based on the detection of a start operation by the start operation detection means.
A stop operation detection means that detects a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol and the stop control means.
A notification means for notifying information for displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means on a determination line straddling the plurality of display columns, and
A notification game control means for controlling the operation of a notification game in which notification by the notification means is executed is provided.
The notification game is composed of a plurality of layers in which the game is played for a predetermined period of time.
The notification game control means can start the notification game from a layer other than the lowest layer in the plurality of layers, and one step when a predetermined condition is satisfied in each layer other than the highest layer in the plurality of layers. It is moved to the upper layer, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in each layer other than the lowest layer, it is moved to the next lower layer, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the lowest layer, the said. End the notification game,
A specific layer other than the lowest layer among the plurality of layers has a plurality of stages in which the easiness of satisfying the predetermined condition is different.
When moving to the specific layer, one stage is determined from the plurality of stages, and the stage is determined.
Wherein the plurality of stages, Ru is determined according to the type of grade that is determined when the notification game is started
The gaming machine which is characterized a call.

Images